Carbonite eXtreme

User Manual

v15.5
 Thank You For Choosing 8. We will cooperate with and help other
friendly companies.
Ross 9. We will go above and beyond in times of
crisis. If there's no one to authorize the
You've made a great choice. We expect you will required action in times of company or
be very happy with your purchase of Ross customer crisis - do what you know in your
Technology. heart is right. (You may rent helicopters if
necessary.)
Our mission is to:
1. Provide a Superior Customer Experience
• offer the best product quality and
support
2. Make Cool Practical Technology
• develop great products that customers
love

Ross has become well known for the Ross Video

Code of Ethics. It guides our interactions and
empowers our employees. I hope you enjoy
reading it below.
If anything at all with your Ross experience does
not live up to your expectations be sure to reach
out to us at [email protected].

David Ross
CEO, Ross Video
[email protected]

Ross Video Code of Ethics

Any company is the sum total of the people that
make things happen. At Ross, our employees
are a special group. Our employees truly care
about doing a great job and delivering a high
quality customer experience every day. This
code of ethics hangs on the wall of all Ross Video
locations to guide our behavior:
1. We will always act in our customers' best
interest.
2. We will do our best to understand our
customers' requirements.
3. We will not ship crap.
4. We will be great to work with.
5. We will do something extra for our
customers, as an apology, when something
big goes wrong and it's our fault.
6. We will keep our promises.
7. We will treat the competition with respect.

ii • Thank You For Choosing Ross — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)
Document Information processing activities performed on that data
when you use Our products and services ( “
Services ” ).
• Ross Part Number: 4803DR-110-15.5
Your use of Our Services is covered by Our
• Release Date: January, 2022. Printed in
Privacy Policy which can be reviewed by
Canada
navigating to www.rossvideo.com/privacy-policy.
• Equipment: This document applies to all
This Notice is intended to supplement the
Carbonite Black frames and control panels.
Privacy Policy and addresses pertinent data
processing activities as you make use of Ross
Copyright Video Switchers.
©2022 Ross Video Limited, Ross®, MiniME™, and
any related marks are trademarks or registered Use and Purpose
trademarks of Ross Video Limited. All other From time to time during the useful life of your
trademarks are the property of their respective Ross Video Services, you may experience
companies. PATENTS ISSUED and PENDING. All technical issues with these products, depending
rights reserved. No part of this publication may on how you use these products and the
be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or environments in which they are used. To assist
transmitted in any form or by any means, you to resolve these issues via our Technical
mechanical, photocopying, recording or Support Services (Technical Support on page vii),
otherwise, without the prior written permission Ross Video may require certain data from your
of Ross Video. While every precaution has been systems, such as:
taken in the preparation of this document, Ross
Video assumes no responsibility for errors or • Kernel logs: baseOS (Operating System) logs
omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for like access logs, authorization logs, error logs,
damages resulting from the use of the etc.
information contained herein. • System boot information: boot up, version
® ® ® information, hardware, start-up information,
Microsoft , Windows , and Windows XP are
module discovery information.
either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States • Device connection logs these can be specific
and/or other countries. to your device.
• Generic Information: Video Reference, Button
Macintosh®, and OS X® are trademarks of Apple
presses (panel), Crosspoint state,
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
temperatures, etc.
Google Chrome™, Google®, and the Google logo
are registered trademarks of Google Inc. How to securely transfer the data to Ross
NDI® is a registered trademark of NewTek, Inc. Video’s Technical Support Team
The log files can either be shared with the
Patents Technical Support Team via email or uploaded
Patent numbers US 7,034,886; US 7,508,455; US to a Ross Video customer portal. The information
7,602,446; US 7,802,802 B2; US 7,834,886; US contained in these files, such as those listed
7,914,332; US 8,307,284; US 8,407,374 B2; US above, may contain sensitive data.
8,499,019 B2; US 8,519,949 B2; US 8,743,292 B2; Ross Video does not make use of this
US D752,530 S; GB 2,419,119 B; GB 2,447,380 B; information other than for resolving technical
and other patents pending. issues. For further information pertaining to
Ross Video’s Customer data retention practices,
Ross Video Switchers Privacy Notice please refer to Our Privacy Policy at
www.rossvideo.com/privacy-policy.
Scope of this Notice
Data Integrity and Security
We at Ross Video Ltd. ( “ We ” , “ Us ” , or “ Our
” ) know that your privacy is important. This We recommend that to maintain the data
Notice is designed to give you notice of the integrity of the information you share with US,
categories of data that are collected, and the you password protect the file when sharing with
Ross Video or encrypt the data to ensure the

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Document Information • iii

 confidentiality of your data remains intact. For ESD Susceptibility: This symbol is used to alert the
more information on how to do this, please user that an electrical or electronic device or assembly
speak with your Ross Video representative. is susceptible to damage from an ESD event.

Ross Video has implemented appropriate

security controls to protect the confidentiality, Important Safety Instructions
integrity, and privacy of customers data.
Warning: Read these instructions.
1.
Privacy Contact 2. Keep these instructions.
For any additional questions, please reach out 3. Heed all warnings.
to mailto:[email protected] and refer to
4. Follow all instructions.
Our Privacy Policy for more details.
5. Do not use this apparatus near water.
Important Regulatory and Safety 6. Clean only with a dry cloth.
Notices to Service Personnel 7. Do not block any ventilation openings.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's
Before using this product and any associated instructions.
equipment, refer to the “ Important Safety
8. Do not install near heat sources such as
Instructions ” listed in the front of this manual
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
to avoid personnel injury and to prevent
apparatus (including amplifiers) that
product damage.
produce heat.
Product may require specific equipment, and/or 9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the
installation procedures to be carried out to polarized or grounding-type plug. A
satisfy certain regulatory compliance polarized plug has two blades with one
requirements. Notices have been included in wider than the other. A grounding type plug
this publication to call attention to these specific has two blades and a third grounding prong.
requirements. The third prong is provided for your safety.
If the provided plug does not fit into your
Symbol Meanings outlet, consult an electrician for replacement
Protective Earth: This symbol identifies a Protective of the obsolete outlet.
Earth (PE) terminal, which is provided for connection 10. Protect the power cord from being walked
of the supply system's protective earth (green or
green/yellow) conductor.
on or pinched, particularly at plugs,
convenience receptacles, and the point
Important: This symbol on the equipment refers you where they exit from the apparatus.
to important operating and maintenance (servicing) 11. Only use attachments/accessories specified
instructions within the Product Manual
by the manufacturer.
Documentation. Failure to heed this information may
present a major risk of damage or injury to persons 12. Unplug this apparatus during lightning
or equipment. storms or when unused for long periods of
time.
Warning: The symbol with the word “ Warning ”
within the equipment manual indicates a potentially 13. Refer all servicing to qualified service
hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result personnel. Servicing is required when the
in death or serious injury. apparatus has been damaged in any way,
such as when the power-supply cord or plug
CAUTION: The symbol with the word “ Caution ” is damaged, liquid has been spilled or
within the equipment manual indicates a potentially objects have fallen into the apparatus, the
hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result
in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to apparatus has been exposed to rain or
alert against unsafe practices. moisture, does not operate normally, or has
been dropped.
Warning Hazardous Voltages: This symbol is 14. Do not expose this apparatus to dripping or
intended to alert the user to the presence of
uninsulated “ dangerous voltage ” within the product
splashing, and ensure that no objects filled
enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to with liquids, such as vases, are placed on
constitute a risk of shock to persons. the apparatus.

iv • Document Information — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

15. To completely disconnect this apparatus 26. The safe operation of this equipment
from the AC Mains, disconnect the power requires that the user heed and adhere to
supply cord plug from the AC receptacle. all installation and servicing instruction
16. The mains plug of the power supply cord contained within the equipment's Setup
shall remain readily operable. Manuals.
Warning: This product includes an “ Ethernet
17. Warning: Indoor Use: To reduce the risk of fire 27. Port ” which allows this product to be connected
or electric shock, do not expose this apparatus
to rain or moisture. to a local area network (LAN). Only connect to
networks that remain inside the building. Do not
connect to networks that go outside the building.
18. The safe operation of this product requires
that a protective earth connection be
CAUTION: Hazardous Energy Levels are present
provided. A grounding conductor in the 28. on the chassis midplane where I/O card
equipment's supply cord provides this resettable fuses are located. Access to the inside
protective earth. To reduce the risk of chassis areas is restricted to service personnel
only. Refer to the Installation and Diagnostic
electrical shock to the operator and service
instruction sections for important information
personnel, this ground conductor must be on the means to avoid this hazard.
connected to an earthed ground.

19. Warning: This apparatus, when equipped with 29. The socket-outlet shall be installed near the
multiple power supplies, can generate high equipment and shall be easily accessible.
leakage currents. To reduce the risk of electric
shock, ensure that each individual supply cord CAUTION: This apparatus contains a Lithium
30. battery, which if replaced incorrectly, or with an
is connected to its own separate branch circuit
with an earth connection. incorrect type, may cause an explosion. Replace
only with a CR2032 coin type lithium battery.
Dispose of used batteries according to the
CAUTION: These service instructions are for use manufacturer's instruction by qualified service
20. by qualified service personnel only. To reduce personnel.
the risk of electric shock, do not perform any
servicing other than that contained in the
operating instructions unless you are qualified 31. For use at altitude 2000m or lower.
to do so. 32. For use in non-tropical locations.
CAUTION: Do not make mechanical or electrical
21. Service barriers within this product are 33. modifications to the equipment or add metallic
intended to protect the operator and service items, such as metallic foil labels, to the printed
personnel from hazardous voltages. For circuit boards. Modifications can impair
continued safety, replace all barriers after regulatory compliance, or performance and may
void your warranty.
servicing.
22. Certain parts of this equipment still present
a safety hazard with the power switch in the EMC Notices
OFF position. To avoid electrical shock,
disconnect all A/C power cords from the United States of America — FCC Part 15
chassis' rear appliance connectors before
This equipment has been tested and found to
servicing.
comply with the limits for a class A Digital
23. This product contains safety critical parts, device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
which, if incorrectly replaced, may present These limits are designed to provide reasonable
a risk of fire or electrical shock. Components protection against harmful interference when
contained within the product's power the equipment is operated in a commercial
supplies and power supply area are not environment. This equipment generates, uses,
intended to be customer-serviced and and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
should be returned to the factory for repair. not installed and used in accordance with the
24. To reduce the risk of fire, replacement fuses instruction manual, may cause harmful
must be the same type and rating. interference to radio communications.
25. Use only power cords specified for this Operation of this equipment in a residential
product and certified for the country of use. area is likely to cause harmful interference in
which case the user will be required to correct
the interference at his own expense.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Document Information • v

 Important: Changes or modifications to this
equipment not expressly approved by Ross Video
Warranty and Repair Policy
Limited could void the user's authority to operate this Ross Video Limited (Ross) warrants its switchers
equipment. and related options, to be free from defects
under normal use and service for a period of
Canada ONE YEAR from the date of shipment. Fader
This Class “ A ” digital apparatus complies with handle assemblies are warranted for the life of
Canadian ICES-003. the product. If an item becomes defective within
the warranty period Ross will repair or replace
Cet appareil numérique de la classe “ A ” est the defective item, as determined solely by Ross.
conforme a la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
Warranty repairs will be conducted at Ross, with
Korea — Class A Statement all shipping FOB Ross dock. If repairs are
conducted at the customer site, reasonable
이 기기는 업무용 환경에서 사용할 목적으로 적합성
out-of-pocket charges will apply. At the
평가를 받은 기기로서 가정용 환경에서 사용하는 경
discretion of Ross, and on a temporary loan
우 전파간섭의 우려가 있습니다.
basis, plug in circuit boards or other
This device has been evaluated for conformity replacement parts may be supplied free of
for use in a business environment. When used charge while defective items undergo repair.
in a home environment, there is a danger of Return packing, shipping, and special handling
interference. costs are the responsibility of the customer.

Europe Software upgrades for switchers may occur

from time to time, and are determined by Ross
This equipment is in compliance with the Video. The upgrades are posted on the Ross
essential requirements and other relevant Video website, and are free of charge for the life
provisions of CE Directive 93/68/EEC. of the switcher.
International This warranty is void if products are subjected
to misuse, neglect, accident, improper
This equipment has been tested to CISPR
installation or application, or unauthorized
22:1997 along with amendments A1:2000 and
modification.
A2:2002, and found to comply with the limits
for a Class A Digital device. In no event shall Ross Video Limited be liable
for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or
Important: This is a Class A product. In domestic
consequential damages (including loss of profit).
environments, this product may cause radio
interference, in which case the user may have to take Implied warranties, including that of
adequate measures. merchantability and fitness for a particular
purpose, are expressly limited to the duration
of this warranty.
General Handling Guidelines
This warranty is TRANSFERABLE to subsequent
• Careful handling, using proper ESD owners, subject to Ross Video's notification of
precautions, must be observed. change of ownership.
• Power down the system before PCB removal.
Environmental Information
A Word About Static Discharge
Throughout the many procedures in this Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment
manual, please observe all static discharge Directive (WEEE Directive)
precautions.
The equipment that you purchased required
CAUTION: Avoid handling the switcher circuit boards the extraction and use of natural resources
in high static environments such as carpeted areas, for its production. It may contain hazardous
and when synthetic fiber clothing is worn. Touch the
frame to dissipate static charge before removing substances that could impact health and the
boards from the frame, and exercise proper environment.
grounding precautions when working on circuit
boards. Exercise proper grounding precautions when
To avoid the potential release of those
working on circuit boards. substances into the environment and to
diminish the need for the extraction of natural

vi • Document Information — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

resources, Ross Video encourages you to use the Company Address
appropriate take-back systems. These systems
will reuse or recycle most of the materials from Ross Video Limited — 8 John Street Iroquois,
your end-of-life equipment in an Ontario, Canada, K0E 1K0
environmentally friendly and health conscious Ross Video Incorporated — P.O. Box 880,
manner. Ogdensburg, New York, USA, 13669-0880
The crossed-out wheeled bin symbol invites you
General Business (+1)613-652-4886
to use these systems.
Office:
Fax: (+1)613-652-4425

Toll Free Technical 1-844-652-0645

Support (North
America):
If you need more information on the collection,
Toll Free Technical +800 1005 0100
reuse, and recycling systems, please contact
Support
your local or regional waste administration.
(International):
You can also contact Ross Video for more
information on the environmental Technical Support: (+1)613-652-4886
performances of our products. After Hours (+1)613-349-0006
Emergency:
Use of Hazardous Substances in Electrical
and Electronic Products (China RoHS) E-Mail (Support): [email protected]
Ross Video Limited has reviewed all components E-Mail (General): [email protected]
and processes for compliance to:
Website www.rossvideo.com
“ Management Methods for the Restriction of
the Use of Hazardous Substances in Electrical
and Electronic Products ” also known as China Technical Support
RoHS. At Ross Video, we take pride in the quality of
The “ Environmentally Friendly Use Period ” our products, but if a problem does occur, help
(EFUP) and Hazardous Substance Tables have is as close as the nearest telephone.
been established for all products. We are Our 24-Hour Hot Line service ensures you have
currently updating all of our Product Manuals. access to technical expertise around the clock.
The Hazardous substances tables are available After-sales service and technical support are
on our website at: http://www.rossvideo.com provided directly by Ross Video personnel.
/about-ross/company-profile/green-practices During business hours (eastern standard time),
/china-rohs.html technical support personnel are available by
telephone. Outside of normal business hours
电器电子产品中有害物质的使用 and on weekends, a direct emergency technical
support phone line is available. If the technical
Ross Video Limited 按照以下的标准对所有组件和
support personnel who is on call does not
流程进行了审查：
answer this line immediately, a voice message
"电器电子产品有害物质限制使用管理办法" 也被称 can be left and the call will be returned shortly.
为中国RoHS。 Our Technical support staff are available to
所有产品都具有 "环保使用期限" (EFUP）和有害物 react to any problem and to do whatever is
质表。目前，我们正在 更新我们所有的产品手册。 necessary to ensure customer satisfaction.
有害物质表在我们的网站：
http://www.rossvideo.com/about-ross Supporting Documentation
/company-profile/green-practices/china-rohs.html Ross Video provides a wide variety of helpful
documentation for the setup and support of your
equipment. Most of this documentation can be
found either on the Product Resources disk that

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Document Information • vii

 came with your equipment, on the Ross Video • SideBox Installation (4802DR-304) —
website (www.rossvideo.com), or on the Ross installation and mounting instruction for
Video Community site SideBox module
(discussions.rossvideo.com/) • Auxiliary Control Panel Installation
Carbonite Documentation (4802DR-305) — installation and mounting
instruction for remote aux panel
• Carbonite Online Help for DashBoard —
(CPS-AUX-053B)
visit help.rossvideo.com/carbonite
• C10 2 ME Upgrade (4802DR-306) — 1 to 2
• Operation Manual (4802DR-110) —
ME upgrade instructions for the C10 control
operational instructions for all Carbonite
panel
switchers
• GVG100 Supported Command (4802DR-401)
• Carbonite Setup Manual (4802DR-120) —
— connection and GVG100 commands
setup and configuration instructions for
supported by the switcher
Carbonite, Carbonite+, and Carbonite
• RossTalk Commands (4802DR-403) —
MultiMedia frames
supported commands using RossTalk
• Carbonite eXtreme Setup Manual
protocol
(4803DR-120) — setup and configuration
• Device Setup Sheets (4802DR-6xx) — setup
instructions for Carbonite eXtreme frames
information for controlling external devices
• Carbonite QuickStart Poster (4802DR-200)
from the switcher
— setup information and specifications for
• Robotic Camera Control (4802DR-131) —
the Carbonite, Carbonite+, and Carbonite
overview of the operational interface when
MultiMedia frames
controlling a robotic camera from the
• Carbonite eXtreme QuickStart Poster
switcher
(4803DR-200) — setup information and
• Audio Mixer Control (4802DR-132) —
specifications for the Carbonite eXtreme
overview of the operational interface when
frame
controlling an audio mixer from the switcher
• Upgrade Notes (4802DR-500) — upgrade
• Video Server Control (4802DR-133) —
instructions, new features, and known issues
overview of the operational interface when
for a given software version
controlling a video server from the switcher
• Carbonite eXtreme Upgrade for
• Configuration Guide (4802DR-100) —
NK-3G144-X — upgrade instructions for the
product description and marketing codes for
NK-3G144-X router to a Carbonite eXtreme
switchers and options
switcher
• CarboNET Installation (4805DR-100) —
• Software Licenses (4802DR-502) —
installation instructions for the Carbonite
third-party software licences
PMC translator.
• Carbonite Multilingual Safety Information
(4802DR-503) — translated product safety NK Series Documentation
information • NK-IPS User Guide (9807DR-1004) — setup
• Carbonite Frame Fan Replacement information for the NK-IPS
(4802DR-300) — instructions for replacing • NK Series Device Finder (9807DR-024) —
cooling fans in the Carbonite, Carbonite+, setup information for using Device Finder to
Carbonite MultiMedia, Carbonite Black, or set the IP address of an NK-IPS
Carbonite Black+ frames
• Carbonite Frame RAM Replacement
(4802DR-301) — instructions for replacing
the RAM in the Carbonite, Carbonite+, or
Carbonite MultiMedia frames
• Control Panel Desk Mounting (4802DR-302)
— desk mounting instructions for Carbonite
control panel
• 1-2 ME Upgrade (4802DR-303) — 1 to 2 ME
upgrade instructions for C1-A and C1M
control panels

viii • Document Information — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Contents
Video Layering...............................................23
Re-Entry...................................................................................23
Re-Entry Timing......................................................23
Features..........................................................13 To Re-Enter an ME..................................................23
Clean Feed Output.................................................................13 FlexiClean Clean Feed............................................................24
Custom Controls....................................................................13
Device Control........................................................................13
DVE (Fly Key)...........................................................................13 Video Preview.................................................25
Effects Dissolve.......................................................................13 MultiViewer.............................................................................25
General Purpose Interface (GPI)..........................................13
Half ME....................................................................................13
LiveEDL....................................................................................13
Matte/Wash Generator.........................................................14
Matte Source..................................................26
To Set Up a Matte Color........................................................26
ME Effect System....................................................................14
To Set Up a Wash...................................................................26
Media-Store............................................................................14
MediaManager.......................................................................14
MediaWipe..............................................................................14
MemoryAI Recall Mode.........................................................14 Copying...........................................................27
Memory System.....................................................................14 ME Copy...................................................................................27
™
MiniME ...................................................................................14 To Copy an ME........................................................27
MultiScreen.............................................................................14 Key Copy..................................................................................27
MultiViewer.............................................................................15 To Copy a Key.........................................................27
ViewControl............................................................................15 Key Swap.................................................................................27
®
OverDrive Caprica Support.................................................15 To Perform a Key Swap.........................................27
Pattern and Matte/Wash Generators..................................15
Tally Outputs..........................................................................15
UltraChrome...........................................................................15 Transitions......................................................28
XPression Live CG...................................................................15 Performing Transitions.........................................................28
To Perform a Transition........................................28
To Perform a Transition on TouchDrive
DashBoard......................................................17 (Memory Area)................................................30
Switcher Status in DashBoard..............................................17 To Perform a Transition on TouchDrive (No
Configuration.........................................................................17 Memory Area).................................................31
Live Assist................................................................................17 To Perform a Transition on Carbonite
PaneLINK.................................................................17 Black.................................................................32
To Assign a Page to a Custom Page Cut Transitions.......................................................................33
Button..............................................................17 Dissolve Transitions...............................................................33
Custom Controls....................................................................18 To Set Up a Dissolve..............................................33
ViewControl............................................................................18 WhiteFlash..............................................................................33
MediaManager.......................................................................18 To Set Up a WhiteFlash..........................................33
Personality..............................................................................18 Wipe Transitions.....................................................................34
Help..........................................................................................18 To Set Up a Wipe....................................................34
DVE Transitions......................................................................34
To Set Up a DVE Transition...................................34
SoftPanel.........................................................19 MediaWipe Transitions..........................................................35
To Set Up a MediaWipe.........................................35
Menu Area...............................................................................19
User Area.................................................................................19
Control Area............................................................................19
Bus Area..................................................................................20 Keying..............................................................37
Self Keys..................................................................................37
To Set Up a Self Key...............................................37
Audio and Video Processing.........................21 Auto Select Keys.....................................................................37
To Set Up an Auto Select Key................................37
Video Processing and Flow...................................................21
UltraChrome Chroma Key ....................................................38
Audio Processing and Flow...................................................21
Chroma Key Modes................................................38
Chroma Key Basic Mode.......................................38
Chroma Key Advanced Mode...............................40
Video Sources.................................................22 ™
MiniME Chroma Key Output...............................42
To Select a Source on a Bus from DashBoard....................22 DVE Keys..................................................................................42
To Set Up a DVE Key...............................................43

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Contents • ix

 To Apply a DVE to a Key (Fly Key).........................43
To Apply a Border/Edge Softness to a DVE
Key....................................................................44 Video Reference.............................................61
Show Alpha.............................................................................44
Supported Reference Formats.............................................61
Masks.......................................................................................44
Reference and Video Mode Setup........................................61
To Pattern Mask a Key...........................................44
To Set a Video Mode..............................................61
To Box Mask a Key.................................................45
Output Reference Synchronizers.........................................62
Split Keys.................................................................................45
To Set Up an Output Reference Sync...................62
To Set Up a Split Key..............................................45
Switching Field........................................................................62
To Set the Switching Field.....................................62

Memory Functions.........................................46
Storing Memories..................................................................46 Switcher Modes..............................................64
To Store a Memory................................................46
To Set the Switcher Mode.....................................................64
Recalling Memories...............................................................46
Memory Attribute Color Coding...........................47
To Recall a Memory................................................47
Memory Attributes.................................................................48
Video Inputs...................................................65
To Set the Memory Attributes..............................48 Video Input Setup..................................................................65
Deleting a Memory................................................................49 To Set up an External Video Input.......................65
To Delete a Memory..............................................49 To Set up an Internal Video Input........................65
Source Names........................................................................66
To Set Up a Source Name.....................................66
To Save and Upload a Router Mnemonic
Switcher Sets..................................................50 Names File.......................................................66
To Store a Set..........................................................................50
To Assign a TSL ID to a Video Input.....................66
To Load a Set..........................................................................50
Mnemonics.............................................................................67
To Customize Mnemonics for
TouchDrive......................................................67
Media-Store....................................................52 To Customize Mnemonics for Carbonite
Working With Media-Store Animations...............................52 Black.................................................................67
Working With Media-Store Audio........................................52 Auto Key Setup.......................................................................67
Media-Store File Specifications.............................................53 To Set Up an Auto Key Association......................68
Loading Stills or Animations.................................................53 GPI Device Control.................................................................68
To Load a Media Item............................................53 To Assign a GPI to a Video Source.......................68
MediaManager Channel Control..........................................53 Tallies Setup............................................................................69
Media-Store Attributes..........................................................54 To Assign a Tally to an Input.................................69
Media-Store Capture.............................................................54 Custom Page Auto Follow.....................................................69
To Capture a Still From the Panel.........................55 To Assign a Page to a Custom Page
Button..............................................................69
To Assign a Custom Page to Follow an
Custom Controls............................................56 Input.................................................................69
Substitution Table..................................................................70
Recording/Editing Custom Controls....................................56
To Set Up a Pre-Tiled Source................................70
To Record a Custom Control.................................56
To Edit a Custom Control......................................56
Running a Custom Control...................................................57
To Run a Custom Control......................................57 Video Outputs................................................71
Naming Custom Controls......................................................57 Video Output Setup...............................................................71
To Name a Custom Control..................................57 To Set up a Video Output......................................71
Deleting Custom Controls.....................................................58 Output Re-Clocking and Data Rate Selection.....................71
To Delete a Custom Control..................................58 To Set Up Output Re-Clocking and Data Rate
Copying and Pasting Custom Controls...............................58 Selection..........................................................72
To Copy and Paste a Custom Control..................58 Ancillary Data..........................................................................72
To Strip or Pass Ancillary Data..............................72
FlexiClean Clean Feed............................................................72
Network Connections....................................59 To Set Up Clean Feed.............................................73
External Layer Mode..............................................................73
Network Setup........................................................................59
To Set Up Layer Mode...........................................73
To Connect DashBoard to the Frame..................59
ME Follows..............................................................................73
To Change the IP Address.....................................59
To Set Up an ME Follow.........................................74
FTP Connection.......................................................................60
On-Air Setting.........................................................................74
To Create an FTP Connection...............................60
To Set the On-Air Status for an Output...............74

x • Contents — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

MultiViewer....................................................75 GPI Control.....................................................91
MultiViewer Output Formats................................................75 GPI Trigger Types...................................................................91
To Set Up a MultiViewer........................................................75 GPI Setup................................................................................91
To Set Up a MultiViewer Clock..............................................76 To Set Up a GPI Input............................................91
To Set Up a GPI Output.........................................92
GPI Output Triggers..............................................................92
™
MultiScreen / MiniME ..................................78 To Assign a GPI Output to a Video
™ Source..............................................................92
MiniME Assignment.............................................................78
To Set Up a MultiScreen........................................................78

Live Edit Decision Lists (LiveEDL).................94

Frame Sync and Format Conversion............80 LiveEDL Setup.........................................................................94
To Set the LiveEDL Behavior.................................94
Supported FSFC Video Formats............................................80
Timecode Setup......................................................................94
To Set Up an Input FSFC........................................................81
To Confirm External LTC Signal............................94
Aspect Ratio Conversion.......................................................82
To Set Up Communications with a
Full............................................................................82
TSC-9902..........................................................94
Zoom........................................................................82
To Set the LTC Timecode Source..........................95
Letterbox.................................................................82
LiveEDL Data Capture............................................................95
Pillarbox..................................................................82
To Start Capturing EDL Data.................................95
To Set an Aspect Ratio for 480i/576i....................82
To Stop Capturing and Save EDL Data................95

System Real-Time Clock/Date......................83

ViewControl (HD Only)..................................97
To Set the System Real-Time Time and Date......................83
ViewControl Overview...........................................................97
Custom Control Buttons........................................97
Bus Selection Buttons............................................97
AES Audio Output...........................................84 Keyer Transition Buttons......................................97
To Assign Audio to an AES Output.......................................84 Transition Buttons.................................................97
Custom Control Button Setup..............................................98
To Set up the Custom Control Buttons...............98
Color Correction.............................................85 ViewControl Setup.................................................................98
™
Proc Amp Color Correction...................................................85 Connecting ViewControl over HDMI ..................98
®
To Apply a Proc Amp to a Video Source..............85 Connecting ViewControl over NDI .....................99
RGB Color Correction ............................................................85
To Apply a RGB Color Correction to a Video
Source..............................................................85 MultiPanel.....................................................101
To Set Up MultiPanel Permissions.....................................101

Personality......................................................87
Personality Settings...............................................................87 Frame Cards..................................................102
General Settings.....................................................87 Rear Modules........................................................................102
Transition Settings.................................................88 To Install a Rear Module.....................................102
Memory Button Behavior......................................................88 Input/Output Cards.............................................................103
To Set the Memory Button Behavior...................89 To Install or Remove a Card...............................103
Memory Recall Behavior.......................................................89 Power Supplies.....................................................................103
To Set the Memory Recall Behavior.....................89 To Install or Remove a Power Supply................103
Router Mnemonics.................................................................89
To Set the Display Name for Router
Mnemonics......................................................89
Color Schemes........................................................................89
Diagnostics...................................................105
Switcher Status.....................................................................105
To Select a Color Scheme......................................89
Switcher Logs.......................................................................105
To Create a Custom Color Scheme......................89
To Copy Logs To a USB........................................105
Bus Maps.................................................................................90
Diagnostics...........................................................................106
To Create a Bus Map..............................................90
Frame DIP Switches.............................................106
User Buttons...........................................................................90
To Run the Tally Test............................................106
To Set A User Button..............................................90
To Run the GPI Input Test...................................106
To Run the GPI Output Test................................106
Error Messages....................................................................106

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Contents • xi

 Switcher Reset......................................................................107
Custom Reset Settings (RState)..........................107
Factory Default Settings......................................107

Specifications...............................................108
Carbonite Resources...........................................................108
Environmental Characteristics...........................................108
Video Input Specifications..................................................108
Video Output Specifications...............................................108
Audio Specifications.............................................................108
Jitter.......................................................................................109
System Timing......................................................................109
Network Ports.......................................................................109
Power Consumption............................................................109
Ports.......................................................................................109
Serial Port..............................................................109
GPI Port.................................................................109
Tally Port...............................................................109
LTC Port.................................................................110
USB Port................................................................110

Custom Control Events................................111

Glossary............................................149

Index.................................................152

xii • Contents — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Features the useful pre-built 2D effects to perform 2D
background transitions.
Thank you for buying a Ross Video Carbonite
Black Series Multi-Definition Live Production
Effects Dissolve
Switcher. The Carbonite Black series builds on The Effects Dissolve feature allows you to
the Ross Video reputation for designing interpolate from one memory to another using
switchers that fit the needs of any production a memory recall. The switcher will interpolate
environment. from the starting memory to the destination
memory, creating a smooth, two key frame
Clean Feed Output effect.
Clean feed is typically used for bilingual and Only elements such as clip level and pattern
live-to-tape productions. It provides a second position can be interpolated in the effects
Program output that is derived from a different dissolve. Other elements, such as crosspoint
location than the standard program output. A selection, pattern, and next transition data are
frequent application is the recording of shows recalled first, and then the switcher will slew to
for later airing without call-in phone numbers the recalled memory.
inserted. An effects dissolve can be performed on as many
The clean feed output can come from before or elements and MEs as required, based on the
between the keyers. memory that is being recalled.

General Purpose Interface (GPI)

The switcher is equipped with 34 GPI I/Os that
can be assigned as either an input or output
Custom Controls independently.
This feature brings the power of macros to the The GPI inputs allow the switcher to interface
switcher operator. Button presses, menu with peripheral equipment such as editors. Each
selections, event commands, or even the GPI input can be used to perform simple editing
switcher state can be recorded to a custom and switcher functions such as fade to black or
control with pauses or holds between the events. an auto transition.
A simple button press can play these events back
again. Step through complex show openings as Half ME
easily as pressing Custom Control buttons 1, 2,
then 3. The half ME option is available for any 2 ME
Carbonite or Carbonite eXtreme switcher and
Device Control adds a third ME with only 2 keyers. The Half ME
feature is not supported by Carbonite Black.
The switcher can control a number of external
Table 1: Half ME vs. Full ME Comparison
devices, such as video servers and robotic
cameras. For a complete list of supported Half ME Full ME
devices, and information on how to set up and
MiniME™ No Yes
control these devices, visit the Ross Video
website MultiScreen No Yes
(rossvideo.com/production-switchers/carbonite/interface-list).

DVE (Fly Key) LiveEDL

The advanced 2D DVE comes standard with each Edit Decision Lists (EDL) are files used by
switcher, and can be used for performing over non-linear editing (NLE) suites to aid in
the shoulder, or picture in picture shots. This post-production. Your switcher can capture EDL
allows all key types to be zoomed, cropped, and data in a file that you load into your NLE suite.
repositioned horizontally and vertically to For information on using the LiveEDL feature,
create the look you want, or you can use one of visit the Ross Video Website (rossvideo.com).

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Features • 13

 Matte/Wash Generator For example, store a memory that has a key
on-air with CAM1 and CAM2 selected on the
A matte generator and complex wash generator background. When this memory is recalled
per ME, capable of multi-color washes comes normally, it pops the same key on-air with CAM1
standard. Any one of the color generators can and CAM2 on the background. When the
be assigned to MATTE, or wipe pattern edges. memory is recalled with MemoryAI turned on,
An additional simple color generator is available CAM1 is selected on the preset bus, and CAM2
for an Aux Bus. is selected on a key that is not on-air. The
transition area is then set up for a background
ME Effect System transition to bring CAM2 onto the background,
take any on-air keys off, and take a key on-air
The ME (Multi-level Effect) systems are standard.
with CAM1.
The number of MEs depends on the chosen
switcher model.
Memory System
Each ME provides 4 keyers supporting pattern
mask, box mask, self-key, and linear key. Storage for 100 complete switcher snapshots
per ME, MiniME™, MultiScreen, and chrome keys
Media-Store comes standard with all switchers. All of these
memories can be stored to a USB media drive,
Up to 2 independent channels of still/animations providing custom tailored memories for every
are available switcher-wide, allowing for operator and every show.
thousands of full screen stills and logos that can
be cached and used on the switcher. MiniME™
Media-Store provides 8 GB of cache. The number
The MiniME™ is an additional ME that is
of images cached increases considerably when
provided with the switcher to perform basic
smaller, non-full screen images like logos are
dissolves and cuts. Each MiniME™ has 2 keyers,
loaded from USB.
background, and preset buses. Unlike a full ME,
the MiniME™ only supports dissolves and cuts,
MediaManager restricts key 1 to DVE keys only, and has no
The MediaManager allows you to easily manage preview output. Key 2 on a MiniME™ is the same
stills and animations on the switcher in a as an ME keyer. The MiniME™ shares all the
graphics interface. same sources as the ME.

MediaWipe MultiScreen
A MediaWipe allows you to use an animation The MultiScreen is made up of a number of
from the Media-Store to play over a background MultiScreen generators. Each MultiScreen
or key transition. When the transition starts, breaks the scene up into separate outputs
the switcher plays the selected animation over (MiniME™ outputs) that can be sent to
top of the background and keys that are being independent projectors or displays to make a
transitioned. A cut, dissolve, wipe, or DVE wipe unified picture.
is then performed layered under the animation Each screen in the MultiScreen output uses a
to bring up the next shot when the animation MiniME™ to create the background and keys of
ends. the output.

MemoryAI Recall Mode

We take the guessing out of memory recalls by
ensuring that a memory recall will not affect
what is currently on-air. MemoryAI uses the
content of the memory to configure the Next
Transition area and Preview bus for the
background and keyers so that the next
transition takes the same sources on-air that
were on-air in the memory.

14 • Features — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

MultiViewer Tip: It is recommended that the large Preview and Program
boxes not be assigned shifted sources as they will follow the bus
Each MultiViewer allows you to view up to 16 selecting.
video sources (32 with Shift), in 47 different
ViewControl takes the MultiViewer output of
layouts, from a single output BNC. Any video
the switcher and overlays the DashBoard
source on the switcher, including ME Program,
interface over it. Bringing the MultiViewer
Preview, and Media-Store channels, can be
output into DashBoard is accomplished either
routed to any box on the MultiViewer. All boxes
by using multiple SDI/HDMI™ converters or a
on the MultiViewer output include mnemonic
single SDI to NDI® converter.
source names and red and green tallies.
OverDrive® Caprica Support
Carbonite can be controlled from OverDrive®
using the Caprica interface. This interface allows
OverDrive® to perform memory recalls,
transitions, and run custom controls on the
switcher. For information on setting up Caprica
to interface with the switcher, refer to the
Figure 1: HD Layouts documentation that came with your Caprica
server.
The switcher must be in a 2.5 ME mode or have
3 MEs installed to be controlled by Caprica.

Pattern and Matte/Wash

Generators
A single pattern generator dedicated to wipes
comes standard, and is equipped with 10 classic
Figure 2: MultiViewer Grid
wipes. Most wipes can be rotated, bordered,
The Carbonite Black comes standard with 2 multiplied, aspectized, and repositioned.
broadcast-quality integrated MultiViewer
generators and the Carbonite Black+ comes
standard with 5. The MultiViewer outputs on
Tally Outputs
the Carbonite Black+ are only available on The switcher has assignable tally relays located
dedicated output BNCs. Each of these in the rack frame. Each tally can be assigned to
MultiViewer outputs has a specific range of any number of combinations of input and
input and output BNCs that can be assigned to output or bus.
boxes on the MultiViewer.
Note: If the switcher is operating in a standard-definition or 3G
UltraChrome
video format, the MultiViewer automatically outputs
The UltraChrome chroma keyers uses advanced
high-definition, but each MultiViewer is only available on specific
output BNCs. video processing technology to provide
exceptional blue spill reduction and clean edges,
even with difficult source material. Glass,
ViewControl smoke, translucent materials, and natural
The ViewControl touchscreen interface through shadows are handled superbly.
DashBoard allows you to select sources on There are 2 floating Chroma Keys that are
switcher buses, perform transitions, and run available across all MEs.
custom controls to recall memories or control
external devices. The MultiViewer Shift function XPression Live CG
allows you to assign sources to a shifted set of
MultiViewer boxes, expanding the number of Seamlessly combine the creative power of the
sources available on ViewControl from 16 to 32. Ross® XPression Designer software with the ease
of use of your Ross® switcher. Create stunning
still graphics using XPression Designer, and

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Features • 15

 transfer them directly to an media-store channel
on the switcher using the RossLinq interface.
Up to two (2) channels with dedicated alpha can
be controlled from the XPression Software
Client. This feature supports still images only.
Each switcher comes with a single license of
XPression. Additional licenses can be ordered.

16 • Features — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

DashBoard selecting the tabs at the bottom of the
DashBoard window.
The DashBoard control system allows remote
access to multiple pieces of Ross Video
equipment, including openGear® cards,
Carbonite production switchers, BlackStorm
video servers, and ACID® UltraChromeHR
cameras.
Download and install the latest version of
Tip: The Custom Views button on the Live Assist page opens
DashBoard from http://www.opengear.tv/. a separate page where you can set up custom DashBoard pages.
Review the documentation that comes with These custom pages can also be set to auto follow specific video
DashBoard for information on installing and sources. This allows you to have Live Assist show a specific custom
launching DashBoard. page when a video source is selected.

Note: Carbonite eXtreme requires DashBoard v9.1, or higher.

PaneLINK
Switcher Status in DashBoard PaneLink allows Live Assist to follow the button
presses on the control panel and display the
The DashBoard control system allows you to relevant tabs. For example, with PaneLINK
connect to the switcher and view status turned on, press SEL for any keyer and Live
information for various components of the Assist shows the settings for that keyer. Press
frame. the WIPE buttons and Live Assist shows the
transitions settings for a wipe. With PaneLINK
turned off, Live Assist does not switch between
tabs.

Tip: If the TouchDrive control panel is connected to the switcher,

an additional tab for Panel is available that shows internal Note: PaneLink only works on the Live Assist page.
temperatures for that panel.
To Assign a Page to a Custom Page Button
Configuration The custom page buttons on the Live Assist page
The Configuration node provides access to can be assigned any custom page or node in
switcher settings such as Reference, Inputs, DashBoard. This allows you to quickly access
Outputs, and MultiViewer. You can switch controls from another device on DashBoard
between the different configurations by from Live Assist on your current device.
selecting the pages at the bottom of the 1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
DashBoard window. System > Live Assist.

2. Click on the Address drop-down list for the

custom page button you want to assign to a
Live Assist page.
The Live Assist node provides access to 3. Select the connection or custom panel that
operational functions such as keying, transition, you want to assign to the custom page
and memory settings of the switcher. You can button.
switch between the different settings by

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — DashBoard • 17

 • All Connections — expand the list and MediaManager
select the device and node that you want
to assign to the custom page button. Some The MediaManager node allows you to control
older DashBoard nodes from plug-ins the Media-Store of the switcher. Upload media
may not display properly on the Live items, load media to channels, and set database
Assist buttons. elements..
Note: Do not assign the Live Assist page to a custom
page on the same machine.

• Open Panels — expand the list and select

the open custom panel you want to assign
to the list. You must have the custom
panel running on DashBoard for it to
appear in the list.
Tip: Click Clear to remove the custom page and name Personality
assigned to that button.
The Personality node provides the switcher
4. Click on the name field for the custom page personality settings.
button you are assigning a page to and enter
a descriptive name for the custom page. The
name appears on the button in Live Assist.

Custom Controls
The Custom Control provides access to
recording, editing, and running custom controls,
as well as setting up the mnemonics for custom
controls on the TouchDrive control panel. Help
The help node in DashBoard launches the
integrated help system with full search
capability.

ViewControl
The ViewControl interface through DashBoard
allows you to coordinate the control over the
switcher through a touchscreen interface.
Through ViewControl you can select sources,
perform transitions, and run custom controls.

18 • DashBoard — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

SoftPanel
SoftPanel provides you with a graphical
interface to the menu system and control
surfaces of the switcher. This allows you to setup
and control the switcher without a control
panel.
Important: SoftPanel is a separate panel connection
to the frame. Refer to MultiPanel on page 101 for The Aux Bus button allows you to select one of
information on setting up SoftPanel. the aux buses that the key bus row in the bus
area is assigned to.
The screen can be broken up into several
Note: The selection of one of the aux bus or key select buttons
different functional areas. Each of these areas indicated what the key bus in the bus area is assigned to. You
allows you to interact with different aspects of may have to switch between the ME/Key and Aux Bus buttons
the switcher interface. to see where the bus is assigned.

Menu Area
The menu area provides a graphic
representation of the menu system on a
Carbonite eXtreme control panel. The Select,
Up, and Down buttons represent the actions of
turning and pressing the knobs on the panel.
The buttons in the top right corner allow you to
navigate around in the menu tree, and the
The Positioner button provides a virtual
stylized mnemonic buttons at the bottom allow
interface to the positioner. The positioner is used
you to access different menus.
in device bus, or to move keys or masks around.
Click and hold the positioner and move it
around to emulate moving the positioner
around. The slider to the right of the positioner
emulated twisting the positioner knob on the
panel. The button to the left of the positioner
emulates the button on the top of the positioner
knob on the panel.

User Area
The user area allows you to select what the bus
area is assigned to, or interact with a virtual
positioner. Press the ME/Key, Aux Bus, or
Positioner button to a select how the user area
appears.
Control Area
The ME/Key button allows you to select what
the bus area is assigned to. Click ME X, MiniME The control area (the upper right of the screen)
X, or MultSc X to assign the bus area to that contains the main DashBoard interface to the
output. Click one of the Key X Sel buttons to switcher. Click Navigation Menu and select the
assign the key bus in the bus area to that key. menu you want to navigate to. When the Live
Assist menu is selected, the sub-menus will
Note: The SoftPanel only shows the buttons that apply to your follow actions in the bus area when PaneLINK
configuration, hardware, and licences. Screen captures may not
is on.
represent your system.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — SoftPanel • 19

 Bus Area
The bus area provides a graphic representation
of the panel row on the switcher. Use the user
area buttons to assign the bus area to an ME,
key, and aux bus. Sources are then selected on
the key, program, and preset buses, and
transitions are set up and performed with the
transition buttons to the right of the source
selection buttons.
Tip: Use the Hold On or 2Press buttons to emulate a press and
hold of a button. This allows you to press and hold one button
and then press another.

20 • SoftPanel — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Audio and Video Processing The following restrictions apply to ancillary data
being included in the output:
Video and audio signals are processed and • All ME program buses pass ancillary data.
passed through the switcher in different ways, • MultiViewer outputs do not include any
depending on how the switcher is being used ancillary data.
or is set up. A better understanding of how the • MiniME™ and MultiScreen outputs do not
switcher is processing these signals help you to include any ancillary data unless an ME with
achieve the production you want. ancillary data is re-entered onto the
background bus.
Video Processing and Flow • ME Preview does not include ancillary data
unless the background is not selected as part
Video is processed in a number of blocks in the
of the next transition.
switcher. After video comes into the switcher,
• A MiniME™ or MultiScreen can include
the frame synchronizers / format converters are
ancillary data if an ME is re-entered onto the
applied (depending on the frame you have). At
background.
this point any required color correction is also
applied. After input the video signal is routed • Any format conversion on the input video
through the crosspoint. The crosspoint can route signal.
any input to any output for straight switching, • Setting ancillary data to be stripped.
or to the video processor and DVE and back for When you are performing a transition, or
video manipulation. Just before the video signal keying, the embedded audio is carried in the
is sent to the output, the processing of the ancillary data of the background video signal.
ancillary data is performed. The ancillary data from the background source
is replaced with the ancillary data from the
preset source, and the ancillary data for keyed
sources is stripped.

Figure 3: Video Flow Through the Switcher

Audio Processing and Flow

Unlike video, the switcher does not handle audio
signals independently. An audio signal is
embedded into the ancillary data of a video
signal before is comes into the switcher. As the
signal comes into the switcher and is
manipulated, you must ensure not to perform
an operation that will force the ancillary data
to be stripped.

Figure 4: Embedded Audio Flow Through the Switcher

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Audio and Video Processing • 21

 Video Sources 4. Select the background, preset, or keyer bus
that you want to select a source on. (does
not apply to Aux bus)
The switcher has access to three basic types of
video sources, external, internal, and follows. Note: Ensure that the source selected on the bus you want
to enter onto the ME, MiniME™, MultiScreen, aux, or keyer
All video sources can be assigned to video source is valid for that destination. If the source is not valid, you
buttons. By pressing a video source button on will not be able to select the bus on the ME, MiniME™, Aux,
or keyer.
a bus, the video source assigned to that button
is selected on that bus.
5. Select the type of source you want to assign
• External — External video sources come to the bus and then select the source.
from cameras, video servers, character
• Physical — the sources on the physical
generators, or other external devices into the
input BNCs.
switcher.
• Internal — internally generated sources,
• Internal — Internal video sources come from
including re-entries.
internally generated video, such as Media
• Aux Follows — use the source that is
-Store channels, matte color, and black.
active on selected aux bus.
• Follows — Follow video sources allow you
• ME Follows — use the source that is
to have one bus follow what is selected on
active on selected ME bus.
another bus. For example, you can assign an
Aux Bus to follow ME 1 Background so that • MiniME Follows — use the source that is
a source selected on the background bus of active on selected MiniME™ bus.
ME 1 is also selected on the Aux Bus. • MultiScreen Follows — use the source
that is active on selected MultiScreen bus.
To Select a Source on a Bus from
DashBoard
To select a video source on a bus, you must
identify the ME, MiniME™, Aux, MultiScreen, or
chroma key and bus you want to assign a video
source to, and then press the source button you
want to select on that bus.
1. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist >
Buses.

2. Click a bus button to select the area that you

want to select a source on. As you select
different areas, the buses for that area are
listed on the row above.
• ME Bus
• MiniME Bus
• MultiScreen Bus
• Aux Bus
3. Click the button for the specific bus or area
you want to select a source on.

22 • Video Sources — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Video Layering
How video is layered in the output of the
switcher depends on how an ME is re-entered
onto the other, and what keyers are on-air for
the ME.
If we assume that each ME has all keyers on-air
and that ME 1 is re-entered into ME 2, the
layering will start with ME 1 Background and
progress to the highest ME and keyer.

Figure 6: MiniME™ Timing Windows

Figure 5: Video Layering To Re-Enter an ME

The process to re-enter any bus onto another is
Tip: You can select a MiniME™ on an ME or different MiniME™ to
re-enter it. Up to two MiniME™ re-entries, including an ME is the same as re-entering an ME onto another ME.
allowed. 1. Set up ME 1 with a background and a key.

Re-Entry
Re-entry is the term used to describe the process
of selecting another ME on an ME. For example,
if you select ME 1 on ME 2, ME 1 is said to be
re-entered onto ME 2. Re-entry takes the output
of an ME and uses it as the background or key
on the other ME. If you select an ME on the
background bus, the ME becomes background
video source of the other ME. If you select an
ME on a Key Bus, the ME becomes the key 2. Set up ME 2 with a key.
source of the other ME.

Keep the following in mind:

Keep the following in mind when working with
re-entries:
• You cannot re-enter ME 2 into ME 1.
• You cannot re-enter an ME, or the Clean Feed
of an ME, into itself.

Re-Entry Timing 3. Select ME 1 as a source on the Background

To maintain proper video timing through the Bus of ME 2. Notice that the output of ME 1
switcher, each MiniME™ exists in a specific is now being used as the background of ME
timing window relative to the MiniME™. These 2.
windows restrict what can be re-entered into
what.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Video Layering • 23

 FlexiClean Clean Feed
FlexiClean provides a second program output
that is derived from a different location than
the standard program output. A frequent
application is the recording of shows for later
airing without call-in phone numbers inserted.
The clean feed output can come from before or
between the keyers.

24 • Video Layering — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Video Preview
Video preview allows you to use an additional
monitor to preview what the next shot is going
to be.
The preview for an ME shows what is selected
for the next transition on that ME. This includes
the keys and background video sources that will
be on-air after the next transition.

MultiViewer
Each MultiViewer allows you to view up to 16
video sources (32 with Shift), in 47 different
layouts, from a single output BNC. Any video
source on the switcher, including ME Program,
Preview, and Media-Store channels, can be
routed to any box on the MultiViewer. All boxes
on the MultiViewer output include mnemonic
source names and red and green tallies.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Video Preview • 25

 Matte Source 1. Use the Hue 1 knob to adjust the hue of the
first custom color.
Matte color backgrounds (BG) are color signals 2. Use the Sat 1 knob to adjust the saturation
that can be applied to backgrounds and keys. of the first custom color.
Color selection is done either by picking a preset 3. Use the Lum 1 knob to adjust the luminance
color, or by adjusted hue, saturation, and of the first custom color.
luminance to create a custom color. 4. Press NEXT.
Select the matte generator (BG) on a background 5. Use the Wash knob to select On.
or key bus. The full region of the background 6. Press NEXT.
or key is filled with the selected color.
7. Use the Size knob to select the size of the
Note: A color background can be a solid color, or a wash of two wash pattern.
colors.
8. Press NEXT > NEXT > NEXT > NEXT.
9. Use the Hue 2 knob to adjust the hue of the
To Set Up a Matte Color second custom color.
1. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist > 10. Use the Sat 2 knob to adjust the saturation
Matte. of the second custom color.
11. Use the Lum 2 knob to adjust the luminance
of the second custom color.

2. Select the matte generator that you want to

set the color for.
• ME X — set the color for the color
background source on the selected ME.
• Global — set the color for the global
matte generator.
3. Click one of the preset colors to assign that
color to the selected matte generator.
Tip: You can select a custom color by clicking the color box
to the right of the preset colors and selecting a new custom
color. Toggle Live on to show the color changes live on the
matte generator source.

To Set Up a Wash
A wash applies colors to a pattern selected for
a matte. The first color is preset to the matte
color, but both are selectable. Selecting the
source button again, or KEY SEL button returns
to this menu. Refer to the sections on mattes and
patterns for information on setting them up.
You can load a preset color instead of creating
the first custom color.
Important: A control panel is required to perform
this procedure. If you do not have access to a physical
control panel, the SoftPanel can be used. The position
of items on the menus on the SoftPanel may not
match those of a physical panel.

26 • Matte Source — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Copying To Copy a Key
This procedure copies the contents of Key 1 to
You can copy the content of an ME or keyer to Key 3 as an example. Use the same procedure
another ME or keyer. for any key combination.
Important: A control panel is required to perform
ME Copy this procedure. If you do not have access to a physical
control panel, the SoftPanel can be used. The position
You can copy the entire contents of an ME, of items on the menus on the SoftPanel may not
MiniME™, or MultiScreen to another ME, match those of a physical panel.
MiniME™, or MultiScreen. The entire contents
of the destination is replaced with the contents 1. Press and hold the KEY 3 SEL button.
of the source. This is the destination keyer that you want
to copy to.
When you copy an ME, the switcher tries to
assign resources to the destination ME to match 2. Press the KEY 1 SEL button.
the source ME. If these resources are not This is the source keyer that you want to
available, the switcher may need to steal copy from.
resources.

To Copy an ME Key Swap

Copy the contents of an ME to another. You can swap the entire contents of any two
1. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist > ME keyers in the same, or different MEs. The video
Copy. source, position, and key type are all swapped
between keyers. This allows you to change the
apparent key priority, or layering, of the keys
in the video output. For example, key 3 appears
over key 2. If you perform a swap between key
3 and key 2, it appears as if key 2 is now over
key 3.

2. Click a Destination button to select the Keep the following in mind:

destination that you want to copy to. Keep the following in mind when performing a
3. Click a Source button to select the source key swap:
you want to copy.
• Key swap does not change the on-air status
4. Click Copy. of a keyer.
• If a DVE key is set to freeze, it will be
Key Copy unfrozen by the swap.
You can copy the entire contents of a keyer to • A key swap can be recorded as part of a
another keyer in the same, or a different ME. custom control.
The entire contents of the destination keyer are
replaced with the contents of the source keyer. To Perform a Key Swap
When you copy a key, the switcher tries to This procedure swaps the contents of Key 2 and
assign resources to the destination key to match Key 3 as an example. Use the same procedure
the source key. If these resources are not for any key combination.
available, the switcher steals resources in the Important: A control panel is required to perform
following order: this procedure. If you do not have access to a physical
control panel, the SoftPanel can be used. The position
1. From off-air keys that are not the source of items on the menus on the SoftPanel may not
key. match those of a physical panel.
2. From the source key, if it is not on-air.
1. Press and hold the KEY 2 SEL button.
3. From on-air keys that are not the source key.
2. Press the KEY 3 button in the transition area.
4. From the source key, even if it is on-air.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Copying • 27

 Transitions transition limit point and goes forward to
complete the transition, instead of going back
to the start.
Transitions are used to change the background
• On a MiniME™, Background and key 2 only
video and take keys on and off-air. A transition
support Dissolve and Cut transitions.
can include any combinations of background
and keyers for an ME, MiniME™, or MultiScreen.
The background and each keyer can be
To Perform a Transition
transitioned independently. All transitions, with the exception of cuts on the
background or key bus, have the same basic
Performing Transitions setup. The touchscreen menu system offers the
touchscreen interface to setup and perform the
What you can include in the transition, and the transition.
type of transition you can perform, depend on
1. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist > MEs.
the number of resources you have, and if you
are performing a background and keyer
transition at the same time.

Keep the following in mind:

Keep the following in mind when performing
transitions:
2. Click the ME X, MiniME X, or MultiScreen X
• If any of the sources going on-air have an for the area you want to perform the
assigned GPI output, the GPI output is transition on.
triggered and the switcher then waits the
configured pre-delay interval before 3. Select the video sources you want to take
performing the transition. If you perform a on-air on each bus. Background and keys
transition with the fader handle, the GPI are set up slightly differently but can be
output is triggered but the pre-delay interval performed with the same transition.
is ignored. • Background — click Trans > Preset and
• If any of the sources going on-air are select the new background source.
assigned to a video server, you can have the • Key On-Air — click the Key X > Key Fill
video server play when the source is taken button for the key you want to take on-air
on-air by toggling Roll Clip on. and select the new source. Repeat this for
• If any of the sources going on-air are each key you want to take on-air.
assigned to a video server, the switcher waits • Key Off-Air — you don't need to select
for the configured pre-delay interval before the keys at this point.
performing the transition. If you perform a Tip: Refer to To Select a Source on a Bus from DashBoard
transition with the fader handle, the on page 22 for information on selecting sources.
pre-delay interval is ignored.
• If the fader is moved during an auto 4. Click Trans.
transition, control of the transition is passed 5. In the Next Transition area, select the
to the fader. You must complete the elements (Background and Keys) you want
transition with the fader. This allows you to to include in the next transition. You can
override any auto transition in progress with include any combination of background and
the fader. keys, but at least one element must be
• The Cut and Auto buttons can be used to selected.
transition keys independently.
• You can pause an auto transition by pressing
the Auto Trans button during the transition.
6. In the Rate field, enter the rate that you
Press the button again to continue the
want the transition performed at. This is the
transition.
speed, in frames, that it takes for the
• If you turn the Transition Limit off when the transition to complete. A Cut or manual
transition has stopped at the transition limit
point, the next transition starts from the

28 • Transitions — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

 fader transitions do not use the transition • Roll Clip — select whether you want any
rate. video server clips assigned to a source
• Background — enter a new ME being taken on-air to play with the
transition rate, in frames, in the Trans transition (On), or not (Off).
Rate field. • Preview — preview the transition on the
• Key Only — enter a new key transition preview output On. You cannot preview
rate, in frames, in the Key X Rate for the the independent key-only transitions or
key you want to transition. a MiniME™ transition.
• Flip Flop — select whether the wipe runs
Note: The key rate is only used for key only transitions.
forward during the first transition and
Keys included in with the background are transitioned
a the ME Rate. then reverse during the second (On), or
if it always runs in the same direction
(Off).
• Direction — select the direction that the
wipe travels.
7. In the Transition area, select the type of auto 9. Click Limit to turn trans limit On or Off.
transition you want to perform. If you want Enter a value for the trans limit in the
to perform a cut you do not need to select a Position field to set the point in a transition
transition type and can move to the next where an auto transition stops. When active,
step. the point in the transition where the auto
transition will stop is indicated by a flashing
segment on the transition progress bar next
to the fader handle on the control panel. The
• DISS — perform a dissolve or WhiteFlash auto transition proceeds to this point and
auto transition. Refer to To Set Up a stops. The second auto transition starts from
Dissolve on page 33 or To Set Up a the transition limit point and goes back to
WhiteFlash on page 33 for more where the first transition started.
information.
• WIPE — perform a wipe auto transition.
Refer to To Set Up a Wipe on page 34 for
more information.
• DVE — perform a DVE auto transition.
Refer to To Set Up a DVE Transition on
page 34 for more information.
• MEDIA WIPE — perform a MediaWipe
auto transition. Refer to To Set Up a Tip: The Limit Position is a percentage with 0 being the
MediaWipe on page 35 for more starting point of the transition and 100 being the ending
point of the transition.
information.
8. Click a Trans Settings button to turn the 10. Perform the transition.
setting on or off. The options available Important: The Cut and Auto buttons trigger
depend on the type of transition selected. a transition on what has been selected. If Trans
is selected a normal background transition is
performed. If one of the keyers is selected (Key
X) a key-only transition is performed on the
selected key.

• Auto Trans — click Auto Trans

• Cut — click Cut
Tip: During an auto trans, press Auto Trans again to hold
the transition at the current position or press Cut to abort
the transition and return to the original source.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Transitions • 29

 11. If a pre-delay has been set, and Roll Clip is 4. The display in the Transition area shows
active, the switcher will apply the pre-delay the current setting for the transition type.
interval before performing the transition. Tap one of theses settings to show additional
options.
To Perform a Transition on TouchDrive Tip: Live Assist follows the transition type selection and
(Memory Area) shows the settings for that transition type.
All transitions, with the exception of cuts on the
background or key bus, have the same basic
setup. The control panel offers physical buttons
and mnemonics to setup and perform the
transition. Some panels have a memory area
that can be used to set the transition rates. • Left — the left button shows the current
1. Select the preset or key sources that you pattern for the wipe or DVE transition.
want to transition to on the buses. Tap the button and swipe left or right on
the display to select a different pattern.
Tip: You can perform a quick, or hot, cut on the
background bus by simply selecting a different source.
For a MediaWipe the button shows the
name of the media item being used for
2. In the Transition area, select the elements the transition.
you want to include with the transition. If • Center — the center button shows the
you are including multiple elements, press current direction for the wipe, DVE, or
and hold the first button and press the other MediaWipe transition. Tap the button
buttons to include them in the same and select a different direction for the
transition. transition to be performed in.
Note: A key should be included in the transition if it is
• Right — the right button shows the
going on-air or off-air. The transition changes the on-air current position of the pattern for the
state of the keyer. If a key is on-air, a red indicator is visible wipe transition or the settings for the
on the display just above the key and the CUTbutton for MediaWipe transition. Tap the button to
that key is red in the Keyer area.
have the 3-knob display show the
position setting of the pattern and use
the positioner to move the pattern
around.
5. In the Memory area, enter the rate that you
want the transition performed at. This is the
speed, in frames, that it takes for the
transition to complete. A Cut or manual
fader transition does not use the transition
rate.
3. In the Transition area, select the type of
auto transition you want to perform. Refer
to the manual that came with your switcher
for information on setting up these
transitions.
• DISS — perform a dissolve or WhiteFlash
transition
• WIPE — perform a wipe transition
• DVE — perform a DVE transition
• MEDIA WIPE — perform a MediaWipe • Background — press ME RATE and use
transition the keypad to enter a new rate, in frames,
and press ENTER. The rate is shown on
Note: The TRANS X buttons are configurable and can be
assigned different functions.
the display on the Transition area.
• Key Only — press KEY RATE and use the
Tip: Press and hold DISS and press Flash on the row keypad to enter a new rate, in frames,
control menu to select a WhiteFlash transition.

30 • Transitions — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

 and press ENTER. The rate is shown on 3. In the Transition area, select the type of
the Keyer area for each individual key. auto transition you want to perform. Refer
to the manual that came with your switcher
Note: The KEY RATE is only used for key only
transitions. Keys included in with the background are for information on setting up these
transitioned a the ME Rate. transitions.
• DISS — perform a dissolve or WhiteFlash
6. Perform the transition. transition
• Auto Transition — press AUTO. The • WIPE — perform a wipe transition
transition is performed at the set • DVE — perform a DVE transition
transition rate. • MEDIA WIPE — perform a MediaWipe
• Cut — press CUT. transition
• Fader — move the fader from one limit Note: The TRANS X buttons are configurable and can be
to the other. The rate at which you push assigned different functions.
the fader determines the speed of the
transition. Tip: Press and hold DISS and press Flash on the row
control menu to select a WhiteFlash transition.
7. If a pre-delay has been set, and the ROLL
CLIP button is active, the switcher will apply 4. The display in the Transition area shows
the pre-delay interval before performing the current setting for the transition type.
the transition. Tap one of theses settings to show additional
options.
To Perform a Transition on TouchDrive Tip: Live Assist follows the transition type selection and
(No Memory Area) shows the settings for that transition type.
All transitions, with the exception of cuts on the
background or key bus, have the same basic
setup. The control panel offers physical buttons
and mnemonics to setup and perform the
transition.
1. Select the preset or key sources that you • Left — the left button shows the current
want to transition to on the buses. pattern for the wipe or DVE transition.
Tap the button and swipe left or right on
Tip: You can perform a quick, or hot, cut on the the display to select a different pattern.
background bus by simply selecting a different source.
For a MediaWipe the button shows the
2. In the Transition area, select the elements name of the media item being used for
you want to include with the transition. If the transition.
you are including multiple elements, press • Center — the center button shows the
and hold the first button and press the other current direction for the wipe, DVE, or
buttons to include them in the same MediaWipe transition. Tap the button
transition. and select a different direction for the
transition to be performed in.
Note: A key should be included in the transition if it is
going on-air or off-air. The transition changes the on-air • Right — the right button shows the
state of the keyer. If a key is on-air, a red indicator is visible current position of the pattern for the
on the display just above the key and the CUTbutton for wipe transition or the settings for the
that key is red in the Keyer area. MediaWipe transition. Tap the button to
have the 3-knob display show the
position setting of the pattern and use
the positioner to move the pattern
around.
5. Set the rate for the transition you want to
perform.
• Background

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Transitions • 31

 a. On the Transition area tap Rate and buttons to include them in the same
use the 3-knob menu to enter the new transition.
rate.
Note: A key should be included in the transition if it is
going on-air or off-air. The transition changes the on-air
state of the keyer. If a key is on-air, a red indicator is visible
just above the include button for that key and the
CUTbutton for that key is red in the Keyer area.

3. In the Transition area, select the type of

• Key Only auto transition you want to perform. Refer
Note: The KEY RATE is only used for key only
to the manual that came with your switcher
transitions. Keys included in with the background are for information on setting up these
transitioned a the ME Rate. transitions.
a. On the Keyer area tap the key you • DISS — perform a dissolve or WhiteFlash
want to set the rate for. transition
• WIPE — perform a wipe transition
• DVE — perform a DVE transition
• MEDIA WIPE — perform a MediaWipe
transition
Note: The USER button is configurable and can be assigned
b. Tap Rate and use the 3-knob menu different functions.
to enter the new rate.
4. In the Memory area, enter the rate that you
6. Perform the transition. want the transition performed at. This is the
• Auto Transition — press AUTO. The speed, in frames, that it takes for the
transition is performed at the set transition to complete. A Cut or manual
transition rate. fader transition does not use the transition
• Cut — press CUT. rate.
• Fader — move the fader from one limit Note: If your control panel does not have a memory area,
to the other. The rate at which you push you can use the Time knob on the 3-knob menu, or
DashBoard, to set the background transition rate.
the fader determines the speed of the
transition. • Background — press ME RATE and use
the keypad to enter a new rate, in frames,
7. If a pre-delay has been set, and the ROLL
and press ENTER.
CLIP button is active, the switcher will apply
the pre-delay interval before performing • Key Only — press KEY RATE and use the
the transition. keypad to enter a new rate, in frames,
and press ENTER.
To Perform a Transition on Carbonite Note: The KEY RATE is only used for key only
transitions. Keys included in with the background are
Black transitioned a the ME Rate.
All transitions, with the exception of cuts on the
background or key bus, have the same basic 5. Perform the transition.
setup. The control panel offers physical buttons
and mnemonics to setup and perform the • Auto Transition — press AUTO. The
transition. transition is performed at the set
transition rate.
1. Select the preset or key sources that you
• Cut — press CUT.
want to transition to on the buses.
• Fader — move the fader from one limit
Tip: You can perform a quick, or hot, cut on the to the other. The rate at which you push
background bus by simply selecting a different source.
the fader determines the speed of the
2. In the Transition area, select the elements transition.
you want to include with the transition. If 6. If a pre-delay has been set, and the ROLL
you are including multiple elements, press CLIP button is active, the switcher will apply
and hold the first button and press the other

32 • Transitions — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

 the pre-delay interval before performing performed in the middle of the transition. The
the transition. video signal on the Background bus is
transitioned to a color background of the
Cut Transitions selected WhiteFlash color. The color background
is then transitioned to the preset bus.
A Cut is an instantaneous transition between WhiteFlash consumes a pattern generator for
video sources. Unlike all the other transition the transition.
types, there are no intermediate steps between
the video source that is on-air, and the video Each ME has a separate WhiteFlash generator.
source you are transitioning to.
To Set Up a WhiteFlash
A WhiteFlash transition is performed just like
a normal dissolve except that you must set the
Cut

color for the flash and the rates for the onset,
A cut is performed either by selecting different hold, and fade.
sources on a background or key bus, or by 1. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist > MEs
pressing a Cut button. and select the ME that you want to perform
the transition on.
Dissolve Transitions Note: A WhiteFlash can only be performed on an ME.
A Dissolve is a gradual fade between video
2. Click Trans > Dissolve, or press DISS in the
sources. For a Background transition, the video
Transition area on the control panel.
signal on the Background bus and the video
signal on the Preset bus are mixed together until 3. Click Flash.
the Preset bus video signal completely replaces Tip: The DISS button on the control panel flashes indicating
the Background bus video signal. a WhiteFlash transition has been selected.

To Set Up a Dissolve
A dissolve transition requires that you set a
background and key transition rate for the auto 4. Use the Onset % and Offset % sliders to
transition. A fader transition does not use the select the percentage of the transition that
transition rate. each phase of the WhiteFlash takes.
1. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist > MEs • Onset — duration of the dissolve to the
and select the ME that you want to perform WhiteFlash color.
the transition on. • Offset — duration of the dissolve to the
Tip: You can use the same procedure for a MiniME™ or preset video source.
MultiScreen. • Hold — duration of the dissolve that the
WhiteFlash color is held. This value is the
2. Click Trans > Dissolve, or press DISS in the
residual of entire duration minus the
Transition area on the control panel.
onset and offset.
5. Select a default or custom color for the
WhiteFlash.
• Default — click one of the preset matte
colors.
• Custom — click the arrow to the right of
3. Click Dissolve.
the Matte Color area and use the Hue,
Saturation, and Lightness sliders to
WhiteFlash select your own color. Click OK to apply
Perform a two-step transition where a dissolve the color or Live to apply it in real-time.
to and from white, or other selected color, is

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Transitions • 33

 Wipe Transitions • Border Size — apply a border to the
pattern and adjust the size. At size 0 the
A Wipe is a gradual transition where one video border is off.
signal is replaced with another according to a • Border Softness — apply softness to the
wipe pattern. In the example below, a line wipe border.
is being used.
• Border Color — select a color for the
border. You can choose between the
predefined colors or use the color picker
to select a custom color.
For Key transitions, the key is wiped on or
off-air with the transition and the background
remains untouched. The duration of a wipe DVE Transitions
transition depends on either the transition rate A DVE transition is a gradual transition where
for the ME, or the rate at which the fader is one video signal is replaced with another
moved. according to a 2D DVE pattern.

To Set Up a Wipe Keep the following in mind:

A wipe transition requires that you select a wipe
Keep the following in mind when performing
pattern, set the direction and number/size of
DVE transitions:
wipe pattern, as well as set a background and
key transition rate for the auto transition. A • You must include the background when
fader transition does not use the transition rate. performing a DVE transition on a Chroma
Key, Self Key, or Auto-Select Key. If you do
1. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist > MEs
not include the background, a dissolve
and select the ME that you want to perform
transition is performed.
the transition on.
• Performing a DVE transition on a DVE Key
Note: A wipe can only be performed on an ME. without including the background scales the
transition effect to the size of the DVE Key.
2. Click Trans > Wipe, or press WIPE in the This transition does not consume an
Transition area on the control panel. additional DVE resource.
• Performing a DVE transition on a DVE Key
with the background included does not scale
the transition effect. This transition
consumes the second DVE resource.
• You cannot perform a DVE transition on a
MultiScreen.
3. In the Wipe Pattern area, select the pattern
that you want to use for the wipe. • You can only perform a DVE transition on a
DVE key on a MiniME™. If the transition
4. Set up the wipe pattern as required.
includes the Background, or a keyer that is
• Wipe Aspect — adjust the aspect ratio of not set as a DVE, the transition is switched to
the wipe pattern. Not all patterns can be a dissolve.
adjusted.
• H-Multiply — multiply the pattern To Set Up a DVE Transition
horizontally. A DVE transition requires that you select the
• V-Multiply — multiply the pattern DVE pattern and duration for the transition.
vertically.
1. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist > MEs
• X-Position — position the pattern on the and select the ME that you want to perform
x-axis. the transition on.
• Y-Position — position the pattern on the
2. Click Trans > DVE, or press DVE in the
y-axis.
Transition area on the control panel.
• Rotation — rotate the pattern. Not all
pattern can be rotated.

34 • Transitions — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

 To Set Up a MediaWipe
A MediaWipe requires that you select the
animation you want to use and then set up how
you want to transition performed under the
animation. This information is stored with the
media item when you press save.
3. Click a DVE Pattern button to select the DVE
wipe pattern you want to use. 1. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist > MEs
and select the ME that you want to perform
MediaWipe Transitions the transition on.
2. Click Trans > Media, or press MEDIA in the
A MediaWipe allows you to use an animation Transition area on the control panel.
to cover a transition. When the transition starts,
the switcher plays the selected animation over
top of the background and keys that are being
transitioned. A MediaWipe can be used to cover
a cut, dissolve, wipe, or DVE transition.
For a cut MediaWipe, the transition is
performed when the cut point is reached. It is 3. In the Media Status area, click a Media X
important to use a full-screen image in the button to select the channel you want to
animation at the cut point so that the cut is not assign an animation to.
visible on-air. 4. In the Media Selection area, click the
thumbnail box for the animation you want
Keep the following in mind: to assign to the Media-Store channel.
Keep the following in mind when performing Tip: Enter the media item number for a media item in the
MediaWipe: field below the thumbnail button assign that button to the
media item.
• Although you can select a still image for a
media transition, it is not recommended. Tip: Click Page 1 or Page 2 to move between the pages of
• Only Auto Transition should be used for MediaWipe animations.
Media transitions. Using the fader to perform
5. In the Trans Layer area, select where the
the transition manually could result in jumps
MediaWipe will occur.
in the animation.
• The duration of the transition (Time) is set • Auto — MediaWipe occurs over highest
by the length of the animation and the play number key in the transition.
speed of the animation. • Bkgd — MediaWipe occurs over the
• The audio associated with a MediaWipe is background, but under all keys.
only available on the AES outputs. • Key1 — MediaWipe occurs over the
• You cannot perform a MediaWipe transition background and key 1, but under
on a MiniME™ or MultiScreen. remaining keys.
• If the Media-Store channel being used for a • Key2 — MediaWipe occurs over the
MediaWipe is set as a MSFS, the transition is background and key 1 and 2, but under
switched to a standard dissolve. remaining keys.
• Only Media-Store channels 1 and 2 can be • Key3 — MediaWipe occurs over the
used for a MediaWipe. background and key 1, 2, and 3, but
• The MediaWipe can be set to occur between under key 4.
any of the keys or the background. When you • Key4 — MediaWipe occurs over the
set the layer to a specific key, the MediaWipe background and all keys.
animation will cover that key, even if the key Important: If a key is above the MediaWipe
is not part of the transition. The animation layer and included in the MediaWipe transition,
plays over the key, but the key remains after it will cut off-air with the transition. This is
normally covered by the animation when the
the animation is finished. Any keys above layer is above the key.
the MediaWipe layer remain on top of the
animation.
6. Click Edit Media Trans.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Transitions • 35

 7. In the Media Over area, select the type of
transition you want to use under the
MediaWipe. This also allows you to set up
the transition parameters for wipes and DVE
transitions.
8. Click Trans Time and use the slider or fader
in the Transition area on the control panel
to set the start and end of the transition
under the MediaWipe.
• (Cut only) Use the Cut Frame slider to
select the point for the cut, or move the
fader to the point in the animation where
you want the cut to happen and click Cut
at Fader Position.
• Use the Start Trans At slider to select the
point where the transition starts, or move
the fader to the point in the animation
where you want the transition to start
and click Start Trans at Fader Position.
• Use the Trans Rate slider to select the
duration of the dissolve, or move the
fader to the point where you want the
transition to end and click End Trans at
Fader Position.
Tip: If you select a negative start point for the transition,
the transition will start first and then the animation will
play after the start point duration has passed.

9. Click Thumbnail and use the Thumbnail

slider to select a point in the animation that
you want to use as a thumbnail for the
MediaWipe. You can also use the fader to
select the position and click Generate
Thumbnail at Fader Position.
10. Click Save to save the new setting to the
selected media item.
11. Click Exit Edit Media Trans.

36 • Transitions — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Keying
Keying is the term used to describe when you
insert (or electronically cut) portions of one
scene into another, or place titles over
background images. Keys are made up of two Tip: Click Show Alpha to have the preview output of the
basic components, an alpha, that cuts the hole current ME switch to the alpha signal that is being used by
in the background video, and a fill, that fills the the selected keyer. Show alpha is not available for MiniME™
outputs.
hole with different video.
Keys, like MEs, are layered onto the background Tip: Click Make Linear to return the clip and gain values
to the default settings.
video signal from the lowest numbered key to
the highest on an ME. 4. Use the Clip slider to remove
Note: DashBoard Live Assist will not notify you of error messages lower-saturated colors from the video
or if a confirmation is required. For example, if there are no image.
available resources for the DVE Key, or Chroma Key, you are
trying to create, the switcher will not create the key and no 5. Use the Gain slider to adjust the transition
notification will be shown. between the video image and the parts of
the video image that are removed.
6. Use the Transparency knob to adjust the
transparency of the key from opaque (0) to
fully transparent (100).
7. Click Key Invert to reverse the polarity of
the key alpha so that the holes in the
background are cut by dark areas of the key
alpha instead of bright areas.
8. Click a Keyer Mode button to override the
shaped setting for the key.
Figure 7: Key Priority
• Normal — set to a linear keyer for an
If you are using a MiniME™, key 1 only supports
unshaped source.
a DVE key type, and key 2 supports all key types.
Key priority on a MiniME™ is the same as on an • Additive — set to an additive keyer for a
ME. shaped source. The Key Invert function
is disabled in this mode.
Self Keys • Full — set the alpha to fully opaque
(white). The Clip, Gain, Make Linear, and
A Self Key is a key in which the luminance, or Key Invert functions are disabled in this
brightness, values of the key source are used as mode.
the alpha for the key.
9. Click Mask to apply a mask to the key.
To Set Up a Self Key
A self key is set up by selecting the keyer and Auto Select Keys
video source you want to use, and adjusting the An Auto Select key is a key in which two video
key parameters. signals are required to make the key. The alpha
1. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist > MEs is used to cut the hole in the video and the fill
and select the ME and key that you want to is used to fill the hole. These signals often
set up. originate from external devices such as
character generators, external still stores, or
Tip: You can use the same procedure for a MiniME™ or other graphics systems.
MultiScreen.

2. Click Key Fill and select the video signal you To Set Up an Auto Select Key
want to use for the key. An auto select key is set up by selecting the
3. Click Self Key. keyer and video source you want to use, and
adjusting the key parameters. The pairing of the

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Keying • 37

 video and alpha video signals is done when UltraChrome Chroma Key
configuring video inputs. Refer to the Setup
Manual that came with your switcher for An UltraChrome Chroma Key is a key in which
information on setting up Auto Keys. the hole is cut based on a color value, or hue,
rather than a luminance value or alpha signal.
1. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist > MEs
The color is removed and replaced with
and select the ME and key that you want to
background video from another source. The
set up.
default color is blue.
Tip: You can use the same procedure for a MiniME™ or
MultiScreen.
Chroma Key adjustments are persistent and are
not affected by a soft reset or switcher reboot.
2. Click Key Fill and select the video signal you However, initializing the Chroma Key or
want to use for the key. performing a factory reset returns all
adjustments to default values.
3. Click Auto Select.
Chroma Key Modes
The UltraChrome Chroma Key operates in one
of two modes, Basic or Advanced, depending on
the complexity of the Chroma Key you are
setting up.
Tip: Click Show Alpha to have the preview output of the • Basic Mode — In basic mode, UltraChrome
current ME switch to the alpha signal that is being used by
the selected keyer. Show alpha is not available for MiniME™ provides a simple background/foreground
outputs. chroma key with adjustment for background
spill and edge softness.
Tip: Click Make Linear to return the clip and gain values
to the default settings.
• Advanced Mode — In advanced mode,
UltraChrome provides advanced background
4. Use the Clip slider to remove shadow and translucency control, as well as
lower-saturated colors from the video control over background/foreground
image. transition areas.
5. Use the Gain slider to adjust the transition Although it is possible to switch back and forth
between the video image and the parts of between advanced and basic mode, the
the video image that are removed. additional image correction of the advanced
6. Use the Transparency knob to adjust the mode is only applied in the advanced mode. For
transparency of the key from opaque (0) to example, if you use the basic mode to set up the
fully transparent (100). Chroma Key and then switch to the advanced
mode, the entire image may change as the image
7. Click Key Invert to reverse the polarity of correctors provided by the advanced mode are
the key alpha so that the holes in the applied at their default settings.
background are cut by dark areas of the key
alpha instead of bright areas.
Chroma Key Basic Mode
8. Click a Keyer Mode button to override the
shaped setting for the key. The following chroma key parameters can be
adjusted in Basic Mode:
• Normal — set to a linear keyer for an
unshaped source. • Background Gain — Allows you to modify
the range of colors that are considered
• Additive — set to an additive keyer for a
background and are masked out of the
shaped source. The Key Invert function
Chroma Key.
is disabled in this mode.
• Edge Softness — Allows you to adjust the
• Full — set the alpha to fully opaque
amount of edge softening applied to the
(white). The Clip, Gain, Make Linear, and
foreground. This helps blend the foreground
Key Invert functions are disabled in this
into the new background.
mode.
• Foreground Clip/Hue/Reject — Allows you
9. Click Mask to apply a mask to the key. to modify the range of colors that are
considered foreground and are not masked.

38 • Keying — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

• Spill Range — Allows you to remove • Increasing the gain value causes the
background color casts that may spill into background to appear more opaque. This
the foreground image (green color cast on results in less of the background color
the foreground from a green-screen for being removed.
example). • Decreasing the gain value causes the
background to appear more transparent.
To Set Up a Chroma Key in Basic Mode This results in more of the background
The UltraChrome chroma key tries to color being removed.
automatically adjust for the scene you are trying 9. Use the Edge Softness slider to add or
to chroma key. For the best results, initialize the remove edge softening of the foreground
key first, and then identify the areas where you image and alpha channel.
need to adjust the key.
• Increasing the softness value increases
1. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist > MEs the amount of softness applied to the
and select the ME and key that you want to foreground edges and alpha channel.
set up.
• Decreasing the softness value decreases
Tip: You can use the same procedure for a MiniME™ or the amount of softness applied to the
MultiScreen. foreground edges and alpha channel.
2. Click Key Fill and select the video signal you 10. Use the Foreground Clip slider to adjust the
want to use for the key. foreground clipping.
3. Click Chroma Key. • Increasing the clip value removes
Tip: Click Show Alpha to have the preview output of the lower-saturated colors from the
current ME switch to the alpha signal that is being used by foreground image.
the selected keyer. Show alpha is not available for MiniME™ • Decreasing the clip value includes
outputs.
lower-saturated colors in the foreground
4. Click Basic. image.
11. Use the Foreground Hue slider to select the
central (base) color for the foreground.
• Increasing the hue value moves
counter-clockwise around the color
wheel to select a base color.
5. Click the Color button for the color you want • Decreasing the hue value moves
to key out. clockwise around the color wheel to
select a base color.
6. Click Init to initialize the chroma key.
Every time the key is initialized, the switcher 12. Use the Foreground Reject slider to include
resets all the Chroma Key parameters to or reject hues adjacent to the base color
their default settings. • Increasing the Reject value decreases the
amount of adjacent hues that are
7. Click an Additive Keying button to turn it included in the foreground.
on or off.
• Decreasing the Reject value increases the
• Off — Reduces the level of detail in the amount of adjacent hues that are
edges of the chroma key as well as the included in the foreground.
overall noise in the key image that can
be the result of certain lighting conditions 13. Use the Spill Range slider to remove any
or high detail camera settings. This is the color cast onto the foreground.
default setting. • Increasing the range value causes more
• On — Include the maximum detail in the of the foreground colors to be corrected
edges of the chroma key. for background color spill.
• Decreasing the range value causes fewer
8. Use the Background Gain slider to adjust
of the foreground colors to be corrected
the background gain.
for background color spill.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Keying • 39

 14. Click Mask to apply a mask to the key. underlying background image that it is being
keyed over.
Chroma Key Advanced Mode • Luminance — Luminance allows you to
An UltraChrome chroma key, in advanced mode, control the overall brightness of Shadow,
breaks the image into five elements which Translucency, and Transition areas as well
determine, or partially determine, which part as partial reflections to more closely match
of the image is keyed out, or removed. the Foreground brightness.
• Background — Background elements are To Set Up a Chroma Key in Advanced Mode
those pixels in the source video that are the
same color as the one you chose to key out. The UltraChrome chroma key tries to
Note that the Shadow and translucent areas automatically adjust for the scene you are trying
(see below) are completely contained within to chroma key. For the best results, initialize the
the Background area. key first, and then identify the areas where you
need to adjust the key.
• Shadow — Shadow elements are those pixels
in the source video with colors that are 1. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist > MEs
within the Background range, but with lower and select the ME and key that you want to
luminance values, depending on the shadow set up.
range. You modify the Shadow range to cover Tip: You can use the same procedure for a MiniME™ or
darker areas of the background (e.g. where MultiScreen.
the foreground is casting a shadow on the
background screen). 2. Click Key Fill and select the video signal you
• Translucency — Translucent elements are want to use for the key.
those pixels in the source video that are in 3. Click Chroma Key.
the Background range, but with higher
Tip: Click Show Alpha to have the preview output of the
luminance values than the Shadow range. current ME switch to the alpha signal that is being used by
You can control the upper-end of the the selected keyer. Show alpha is not available for MiniME™
Translucency range by setting a wider outputs.
hue-range to constrain the area. You can also
control the transparency of the Translucent 4. Click Advanced.
area.
• Transition — Transition elements are those
pixels in the source video with colors that
are not within any of the previous three
ranges and are also not considered part of
the Foreground area. These are typically the
pixels near the edge of the foreground, where 5. Click the Color button for the color you want
it blends into the background. to key out.
• Foreground — Foreground elements are 6. Click Init to initialize the chroma key.
those pixels that are not within the Every time the key is initialized, the switcher
Background, Shadow, Translucency, or resets all the Chroma Key parameters to
Transition ranges. This is the area with colors their default settings.
that will not be keyed out and will remain
solid. 7. Click an Additive Keying button to turn it
on or off.
• Spill Suppress — Spill Suppression elements
are those pixels in the Foreground that have • Off — Reduces the level of detail in the
a noticeable tint of the Background color. edges of the chroma key as well as the
This typically occurs around the edge of the overall noise in the key image that can
foreground subject as glow from the be the result of certain lighting conditions
background blue-screen or green-screen or high detail camera settings. This is the
“spills” onto them. default setting.
• Edge Softness — Edge Softness lets you apply • On — Include the maximum detail in the
varying degrees of softening to the edges of the chroma key.
Foreground edges to help it blend in with the

40 • Keying — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

8. Use the Background Neg Hue slider to 15. Use the Background Suppress slider to
adjust the range of hues that are included change the overall brightness of Shadow,
in the Background, expanding Translucent, and Transition areas.
counter-clockwise around the color wheel. • Increasing the background suppress
9. Use the Background Pos Hue slider to adjust value increases the brightness of
the range of hues that are included in the Background, Translucent, and Transition
Background, expanding clockwise around areas.
the color wheel. • Decreasing the background suppress
10. Use the Background Sat slider to adjust the value decreases the brightness of
saturation range of the background color. Background, Translucent, and Transition
• Increasing the saturation range value areas.
includes a wider range of saturation 16. Use the Luminance Reflection slider to
values to be included in the background. change the brightness of semi-transparent
• Decreasing the saturation range value reflections (like reflections from glasses).
includes a narrower range of saturation • Increasing the reflections value increases
values to be included in the background. the brightness of semi-transparent
11. Use the Edge Softness slider to add or reflections.
remove edge softening of the foreground • Decreasing the reflections value
image and alpha channel. decreases the brightness of
• Increasing the softness value increases semi-transparent reflections.
the amount of softness applied to the 17. Use the Shadow Gain slider to adjust the
foreground edges and alpha channel. shadow appearance.
• Decreasing the softness value decreases • Increasing the gain value creates darker
the amount of softness applied to the shadows.
foreground edges and alpha channel.
• Decreasing the gain value creates lighter
12. Use the Foreground Clip slider to adjust the shadows.
foreground clipping.
18. Use the Shadow Range slider to adjust the
• Increasing the clip value removes range of the shadow colors.
lower-saturated colors from the
• Increasing the range value widens the
Foreground image.
shadow area by including
• Decreasing the clip value includes lower-luminance background colors. The
lower-saturated colors in the Foreground increased range comes as a result of
image. colors moving from the translucent area
13. Use the Foreground Hue slider to select the to the shadow area.
central (base) color for the foreground. • Decreasing the range value narrows the
• Increasing the hue value moves shadow area by excluding
counter-clockwise around the color high-luminance colors. These excluded
wheel to select a base color. colors move back into the translucent
area.
• Decreasing the hue value moves
clockwise around the color wheel to 19. Use the Spill Clip slider to adjust spill
select a base color. suppress clipping.
14. Use the Foreground Reject slider to include • Increasing the clip value removes
or reject hues adjacent to the base color. higher-saturated colors from spill
suppress correction.
• Increasing the reject value decreases the
amount of adjacent hues that are • Decreasing the clip value includes
included in the foreground. higher-saturated colors in spill suppress
correction. If your foreground image
• Decreasing the reject value increases the
contains bright-colored areas that are
amount of adjacent hues that are
suffering from background spill, decrease
included in the foreground.
the clip value to have it corrected.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Keying • 41

 20. Use the Spill Hue slider to select the central, switcher as a chroma key generator for a virtual
or base, color for spill suppress correction. set environment.
If the color spill does not appear to be the
same color as the background, use this Keep the following in mind:
control to adjust which hue is considered to
Keep the following in mind when setting up an
be "spilled" into the foreground.
external chroma key output.
• Increasing the hue value moves
• Only Key 2 from a MiniME™ can be used to
counter-clockwise around the color
output the video/fill of the chroma key. Key
wheel while selecting a base color.
1 must be set to black and off-air.
• Decreasing the hue value moves
• All ancillary data is stripped from the video
clockwise around the color wheel while
source.
selecting a base color.
21. Use the Spill Reject slider to include or reject To Set Up a MiniME™ Chroma Key Output
adjacent hues to the base. The fill of the chroma key is fed out of the
MiniME™ keyer and the alpha is fed out of the
• Increasing the reject value increases the
selected output.
amount of adjacent hues that are
included in spill correction. Note: This procedure uses MiniME™ 4 for the chroma key output,
• Decreasing the reject value decreases the but you can use any MiniME™.
amount of adjacent hues that are 1. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist > MEs
included in spill correction. > MiniME 4.
22. Use the Transition Gain slider to adjust the 2. Click Key 1.
appearance of the Transition colors. 3. Click Key Fill: and select Black.
• Increasing the gain value makes the 4. Click Key 2.
transition area pixels more opaque. 5. Click Key Fill and select the video source
• Decreasing the gain value makes the that you want to chroma key.
transition area pixels more transparent.
6. Click Chroma Key and initialize the key as
23. Use the Translucency Gain slider to adjust normal.
the appearance of the translucent colors. 7. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
• Increasing the gain value causes the Outputs.
translucent colors to appear more 8. Click the Source button for the output that
opaque. you want to feed the chroma key fill from
• Decreasing the gain value causes the and click MinME4.
translucent colors to appear more 9. Click the Source button for the output that
transparent. you want to feed the chroma key alpha from
24. Use the Translucency Range slider to adjust and click MMCKA4.
the range of the translucent colors.
• Increasing the range value widens the
DVE Keys
translucent area by including more hues The DVE key allows you to apply digital video
from the background range (the effects, such as scale, crop, aspect ratio, position,
lower-end of the range is defined by the and border to a video image or another key type.
shadow range you just set). When the DVE is applied to another key type, it
• Decreasing the range value narrows the is said to be flying (Fly Key).
translucent area by excluding hues. Tip: You can see where DVE channels are allocated from the
Status page in DashBoard.
25. Click Mask to apply a mask to the key.

MiniME™ Chroma Key Output Keep the following in mind:

You can use a MiniME™ to output a chroma key Keep the following in mind when working with
fill and alpha. This allows you to use the a Fly Key:

42 • Keying — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

• The Fly Key feature consumes a single DVE 8. Click a Freeze button to freeze the video and
channel for self keys and chroma keys, but appearance of the key (On). When a key is
two DVE channels for an auto select key. frozen, the DVE attributes are disabled and
• The Fly Key feature cannot be applied to a you can not move the key.
DVE key. 9. Click Mask to apply a mask to the key.
• The Key Invert feature is not available for a
Refer to the section To Apply a Border/Edge
Fly Key.
Softness to a DVE Key on page 44 for information
• The self key Fly Key can be used with all on applying a border to the key.
MultiScreen layouts. The auto select key Fly
Key can only be used with the Dual Vert or
To Apply a DVE to a Key (Fly Key)
Dual Horiz MultiScreen layouts.
The Fly key is when the DVE engine is applied
• A chroma key should be initialized and
to another key type.
adjusted before the DVE (Fly Key) is applied
to it. The DVE resources for this key may not be
available. Depending on how your switcher is
To Set Up a DVE Key configured, you may be asked to steal the
The DVE engine allows you to apply digital video resources from another element, or be
effects, such as scale, crop, aspect ratio, position, prevented from using the resources.
and border to a video image in 2D space. You should set up your key as you want it before
applying the Fly Key.
The DVE resources for this key may not be
available. Depending on how your switcher is 1. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist > MEs
configured, you may be asked to steal the and select the ME and key that you want to
resources from another element, or be set up.
prevented from using the resources. 2. Click DVE and click On.
1. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist > MEs
and select the ME and key that you want to
set up.
Tip: You can use the same procedure for a MiniME™ or
MultiScreen.
3. Use the X-Position, Y-Position, and Size
2. Click Key Fill and select the video signal you sliders in the Positioning area to position
want to use for the key. and size the key.
3. Click DVE Key. 4. Use the Aspect slider to adjust the aspect
ratio of the key.
5. Use the Size and Softness sliders in the Edge
Softness area to apply softness to the edges
of to the key.
Refer to the section To Apply a Border/Edge
Tip: Click Show Alpha to have the preview output of the Softness to a DVE Key on page 44 for
current ME switch to the alpha signal that is being used by
information.
the selected keyer. Show alpha is not available for MiniME™
outputs.
6. Use the Left and Right sliders to crop the
left and right sides of the key.
4. Use the X-Position, Y-Position, and Size
sliders in the Positioning area to position 7. Use the Top and Bottom sliders to crop the
and size the key. upper and lower sides of the key.
5. Use the Aspect slider to adjust the aspect 8. Click a Freeze button to freeze the video and
ratio of the key. appearance of the key (On). When a key is
frozen, the DVE attributes are disabled and
6. Use the Left and Right sliders to crop the
you can not move the key.
left and right sides of the key.
7. Use the Top and Bottom sliders to crop the
upper and lower sides of the key.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Keying • 43

 To Apply a Border/Edge Softness to a DVE button. The preview output of the ME shows
Key the processed alpha of the selected key until
A DVE border or edge softness is applied to the the button is pressed again.
edges of the DVE key and is manipulated as part • Toggle the Show Alpha button on from the
of the key. Live Assist.

Note: You can only apply a border to a DVE key. Fly Keys, such
as chroma keys or auto select keys with DVE applied to them
Masks
cannot have a border applied to them. Instead, the selection is A Mask is a technique in which a pattern is
Edge Softness and is used to soften the edges of the key without
any color.
combined with the key source to block out
unwanted portions of the key source.
1. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist > MEs Two types of masks are available, Box masks
and select the ME and key that you want to and Pattern masks. All key types can be masked.
set up.
• Box Mask — uses a simple box shape to mask
Tip: You can use the same procedure for a MiniME™ or out a portion of the key
MultiScreen.
• Pattern Mask — uses a pattern from the
2. Click DVE Key. pattern generator to mask out a portion of
the key

To Pattern Mask a Key

Pattern masks can be adjusted for size, location,
rotation, and multiplication.
1. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist > MEs
3. Use the Size slider in the Border area to turn
and select the ME and key that you want to
on the border and adjust the size of the
set up.
border around the key.
4. Use the Softness slider to adjust the softness Tip: You can use the same procedure for a MiniME™ or
MultiScreen.
of the border.
5. Select a default or custom color for the 2. Click Mask > Pattern.
border (borders only).
• Default — click one of the preset colors.
• Custom — click the arrow to the right of
the Border Color area and use the Hue,
Saturation, and Lightness sliders to
select your own color. Click OK to apply 3. Select the pattern you want to use for the
the color or Live to apply it in real-time. mask.
4. Click Mask Force to force the area inside
Show Alpha the mask region to the foreground.
You to route the processed alpha for the selected 5. Click Mask Invert to invert the masked area
keyer to the preview output for the ME you are with the unmasked area.
working on. 6. Set up the mask pattern as required.
Show alpha is not available on a MiniME™ or • Size — adjust the size of the mask region.
MultiScreen. • Softness — apply softness to the edges
• Select the keyer that you want to show the of the mask region.
alpha for and press and hold the SHOW • Border Size — apply a border to the mask
ALPHA button on the control panel. The region and adjust the size. At size 0 the
preview output of the ME shows the border is off.
processed alpha of the selected key until the • Aspect — adjust the aspect ratio of the
button is released. mask. Not all patterns allow you to adjust
• Select the keyer that you want to show the the aspect.
alpha for and double-press the SHOW ALPHA

44 • Keying — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

 • Rotation — rotate the mask pattern. Not Split Keys
all patterns can be rotated
• H-Multiply — multiply the mask pattern A Split key allows you to assign a different alpha
horizontally. source for a key than the fill/alpha associations
that are set up during configuration, or to use
• V-Multiply — multiply the mask pattern
a separate alpha source for a Self key.
vertically.
• X-Position — position the mask on the A split key can be applied to an auto select, or
x-axis. self key.
• Y-Position — position the mask on the
y-axis. To Set Up a Split Key
A split key works on an Auto Select or Self Key
that has been set up and you want to apply a
To Box Mask a Key
different alpha to.
Box masks can be adjusted for size, location,
rotation, and multiplication. 1. Set up your key with the video source you
want to use.
1. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist > MEs
2. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist and
and select the ME and key that you want to
select the key you want split.
set up.
Tip: From the control panel, press and hold the SELF or
Tip: You can use the same procedure for a MiniME™ or
AUTO (depending on the type of key you are splitting) and
MultiScreen.
press the source button for the new alpha you want to use.

2. Click Mask > Box. 3. Click Key Alpha and select the new alpha
you want to use.

3. Click Mask Force to force the area inside

the mask region to the foreground.
4. Click Mask Invert to invert the masked area
with the unmasked area.
5. Set up the mask as required.
• Size — adjust the size of the mask region.
• Left Edge — adjust the position of the left
edge of the mask region.
• Right Edge — adjust the position of the
right edge of the mask region.
• Top Edge — adjust the position of the top
edge of the mask region.
• Bottom Edge — adjust the position of the
bottom edge of the mask region.
• X-Position — position the mask on the
x-axis. This adjust both the left and right
edges at the same time.
• Y-Position — position the mask on the
y-axis. This adjusts both the top and
bottom edges at the same time.
Tip: You can use the Positioner to adjust the size and
position of the box mask.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Keying • 45

 Memory Functions below the memory number. The currently selected memory
register glows blue.

A memory register is a snapshot of the current 4. Select the recall mode for the memory. This
state of the switcher that can include one or is the mode that is stored in the memory,
multiple ME, MiniME™, MultiScreen, or chroma but can be overridden when the memory is
key outputs. recalled.
Up to 100 memory registers per ME, MiniME™, • Program — all elements are recalled as
MultiScreen, or chroma key can be stored and stored (default).
recalled on the switcher. Each of these memory • MemoryAI — current on-air elements
registers can store as little as the information are unchanged and the transition area is
of one ME, or as much as the current state of configured to take the on-air elements of
the entire switcher, including all ME, MiniME™, the memory on-air with the next
MultiScreen, chroma key outputs, Aux Buses, transition.
and DVE settings. • Effects Dissolve — on-air elements listed
below are transitioned to the elements
Storing Memories stored in the memory. The time it takes
When you store a memory, you are storing the to go from the current elements to the
complete state of that panel row. This includes elements in the memory is set in the
the current state of all the areas on the ME, Effects Duration field.
including keyer settings, transition rates, wipe • Matte colors (background, wash or
and pattern selections, and source selections. borders)
In addition to the current state of the panel, the • Keyer settings like clip, gain,
current settings for the various keyers, such as transparency
chroma key settings, and clip and gain settings, • Mask position and size
are also stored. • Chroma key settings, except the
background color
To Store a Memory • Pattern settings like size, position,
How to store a memory. aspect, border, softness, rotation
1. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist > • DVE settings like size, position, aspect,
Memory > Store > General. border, softness, cropping
• Media-Store x/y position
• Transition Progress

5. Set the memory attributes that you want

recalled with the memory. Refer to Memory
Attributes on page 48 for information on
memory attributes.
2. In the Inclusions area, select the ME,
MiniME™, and MultiScreen that you want to Tip: All attributes are stored in the memory. Turning
individual attributes on or off sets whether that item is
store the memory for. When you include an included with the memory recall. Individual attributes can
area in a memory, the current state of that be turned on or off when the memory is recalled.
area is stored in the memory and will be
recalled with the memory. 6. Click Store to store the memory.
Tip: You can deselect all inclusions for a memory so that
it doesn't affect these areas. This can be used to create a Recalling Memories
memory that only recalls Media-Store or Aux bus selections.
When you recall a memory, the existing
3. In the Memory Store area, click the Bank X configuration of that ME is replaced with the
and X:Mem button for the bank and settings stored in the memory.
memory register that you want to store to.
Tip: If a memory register contains a memory for the area(s)
selected in the Inclusions, the button glows purple and the
areas that the register contains a memory for are listed

46 • Memory Functions — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Keep the following in mind: To Recall a Memory
Keep the following in mind when recalling How to recall a memory using DashBoard.
memories: 1. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist >
• How a memory is recalled depends on the Memory > Recall > General.
how the Memory Attributes are set.
• Recalling a memory that includes a new
Media-Store image to be loaded from a USB
drive may result in the currently loaded
image to be displayed for a few frames while
the new image is loaded.
• Recalling a memory that includes a source
2. In the Inclusions area, select the ME,
assigned to a camera also recalls the shot
MiniME™, and MultiScreen that you want to
stored in the memory for that camera if the
recall the memory for.
Camera memory attribute is set to Recall.
There is no delay in the memory recall so Tip: You can deselect all inclusions for a memory so that
camera movement may be visible while the it doesn't affect these areas. This can be used to create a
memory that only recalls Media-Store or Aux bus selections.
shot is recalled.
• You can override the video source stored in 3. In the Memory Recall area, click the Bank
a memory by pressing and holding a source X button for the bank that you want to recall
button and recalling the memory (Bus Hold). from.
The held source button overrides the source
Important: Clicking a X:Mem button recalls
that is recalled with the memory for that bus.
that memory.
The memory is not affected by a Bus Hold
and will recall properly without the Bus Hold. Tip: If a memory register contains a memory for the area(s)
• Enabling Memory AI mode changes the way selected in the Inclusions, the button glows purple and the
key elements are recalled. If a key is areas that the register contains a memory for are listed
currently on-air, the element for that key is below the memory number.
recalled in the next available off-air key. If
4. Select the recall mode for the memory.
there is no available off-air keys, the element
is not recalled. Note: Recall attributes are color-coded for how they are
going to be recalled. Refer to Memory Attribute Color
Related information Coding on page 47 for information on the color meaning.
Memory Attributes on page 48
• As Stored — recall the memory with the
same attributes that it was stored with.
Memory Attribute Color Coding
• Program — all elements are recalled as
For a memory recall you can set individual stored (default).
attributes to be recalled or not, regardless of • MemoryAI — current on-air elements
how they were stored. How the attribute is are unchanged and the transition area is
recalled is indicated by the color of the attribute configured to take the on-air elements of
button. the memory on-air with the next
Color Description transition.
• Effects Dissolve — recall the memory
As Stored — the memory attribute
is recalled exactly as it was stored with an effects dissolve to the new
in the memory. memory elements. The time it takes to go
from the current elements to the
Recall — the memory attribute is
recalled with the memory, even if elements in the memory is set in the
the attribute was not set to be Effects Duration field or using the Effect
stored with the memory. Duration From Memory.
No Recall — the memory attribute 5. Set the memory attributes that you want
is not recalled with the memory,
even is the attribute was set to be recalled with the memory. Refer to Memory
stored with the memory. Attributes on page 48 for information on
memory attributes.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Memory Functions • 47

 Note: All attributes are stored in the memory. Turning Note: For information on the recall mode
individual attributes on or off sets whether that item is (Program/MemoryAI/Effects Dissolve) refer to To Store
included with the memory recall. Individual attributes can a Memory on page 46.
be turned on or off when the memory is recalled.
• Roll GPO — set whether GPI outputs
6. Click the X:Mem button to recall the attached to sources are triggered when
memory. recalled.
Tip: Click Undo to undo the last memory recall.
• Roll VTR — set whether a play command
is triggered when a source that is
assigned to a video server is recalled.
Memory Attributes • Roll PBus — set whether a PBus trigger
function is sent when a source that is
Memory Attributes allow you to specify what
assigned to a PBus device is recalled.
elements are recalled with a memory, as well
as adding effects to memory recalls. These • Camera — set whether camera shots are
elements include the background/preset buses, recalled.
keyer bus, Aux bus, and Media-Store selections, • MediaX — set whether Media-Store items
as well as keyer on-air status, and transition and settings for the selected channel are
selections. recalled.
In addition to setting which sources to recall 3. Click ME X. The attributes for each ME are
with the memory, effects such as performing an separate and must be set for each ME you
auto transition after the memory recall or want to include in the memory.
running a custom control after the memory
recall, can also be included.
Memory attributes can be set both when the
memory is stored, and when it is recalled. This
allows you to store a set of attributes with a • Trans Area — set how the next transition
memory and then recall it as stored, or override type and parameters are recalled.
the attributes stored in the memory and apply • Next Trans — set how the next transition
different ones when the memory is recalled. A area is recalled.
memory attribute does not need to be stored in • Run Auto — set whether a transition is
the memory to be recalled. performed after the memory is recalled.
Tip: It is recommended that if you are new to working with (Not available during Effects Dissolve
memories, use the memory store attributes to set how you want transitions.)
a memory to be recalled and set the recall attributes to be
Memory.
• PGM Bus — set how the sources selected
on the program bus are recalled.
• PST Bus — set how the sources selected
To Set the Memory Attributes
on the preset bus are recalled.
Memory attributes can be set when the memory • Shared Pattern — set whether the
is stored or when it is recalled. This procedure settings for the shared Key Mask/Wash
sets the store attributes, but the information pattern generator is recalled.
applies to both.
• Key X Bus — set whether the source
1. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist > selected on the key bus is recalled.
Memory > Store. • Key X Active — set whether the on-air
2. Click General and set the attributes as status of the key is recalled.
required. • Key X Type — set whether the key type
is recalled.
• Key X Mask — set whether mask settings
for the key are recalled.
4. Click MiniMEs.

48 • Memory Functions — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

 • Trans Area — set how the next transition • Aux X — set whether the source selected
type and parameters are recalled. on the aux bus is recalled.
• Next Trans — set how the next transition
area is recalled. Deleting a Memory
• Run Auto — set whether a transition is
performed after the memory is recalled. You can delete the contents of a single memory.
(Not available during Effects Dissolve Only one memory can be cleared at a time, and
transitions.) you cannot undo the deletion.
• PGM Bus — set how the sources selected Tip: You can clear all memories from the switcher from the
on the program bus are recalled. control panel. (Press MENU > Reset > NEXT > NEXT.)
• PST Bus — set how the sources selected
on the preset bus are recalled. To Delete a Memory
• Key X Bus — set whether the source Delete an individual memory or bank.
selected on the key bus is recalled. 1. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist >
• Key X Active — set whether the on-air Memory > Store
status of the key is recalled.
2. In the Memory Store area, click the Bank X
• Key X Type — set whether the key type and Mem X button for the memory register
is recalled. that you want to delete.
• Key X Mask — set whether mask settings
3. Click Delete Memory.
for the key are recalled.
5. Click MultiScreens.

• Trans Area — set how the next transition

type and parameters are recalled.
• Next Trans — set how the next transition
area is recalled.
• Run Auto — set whether a transition is
performed after the memory is recalled.
(Not available during Effects Dissolve
transitions.)
• PGM Bus — set how the sources selected
on the program bus are recalled.
• PST Bus — set how the sources selected
on the preset bus are recalled.
• Key X Bus — set whether the source
selected on the key bus is recalled.
• Key X Active — set whether the on-air
status of the key is recalled.
• Key X Type — set whether the key type
is recalled.
• Key X Mask — set whether mask settings
for the key are recalled.
6. Click Auxes.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Memory Functions • 49

 Switcher Sets 3. Click a Select Set button for the set you want
to store the switcher registers to.
The switcher stores configuration and operation 4. Click a Save button to save that register to
data in a number of registers that contain the the selected set. If the button is shown in
individual entries for items such as memories brown, that register already exists in the set
or personality settings. These registers can be and will be overwritten.
stored as a single archive file, or as a register • All — store all registers to the set.
set that contains all the individual register of • Memories — store only the memory
that type; all memories for example. These files registers to the set.
are stored into Sets on USB drive. Different Sets • Customs — store only the custom control
can be created for different shows or registers to the set.
applications, allowing you to quickly locate and • Installation — store only the installation
recall the switcher configurations. registers to the set.
The switcher stores information in the following • Personality — store only the personality
registers: registers to the set.
• Memory — contains all the memories for 5. Click Yes.
ME, MiniME™, and MultiScreen.
• Custom Control — contains all the custom The registers are stored to the set on the USB.
control banks and macros. Tip: You can export the switcher set to your local computer in
• Personality — contains all the user interface the Export Set From Frame area. Click Export As... and navigate
to the folder where you want to store the file and enter a name.
settings, such as transition rates, that are
Click Save and then Export.
stored under the Personality menu. Some
personality settings are specific to the control
panel and can be stored independently if you To Load a Set
are working with a MultiPanel system. Switcher Sets can only be loaded from a USB
• Installation — contains all the external drive. The USB drive must be present before you
device setup, and software settings for the try to load the settings.
switcher.
Note: If you are updating an older setup file, you must perform
a Recall All followed by a Store All. This updates the setup files
To Store a Set the latest format. You can then make changes and store to
individual registers if needed.
Switcher Sets can only be stored to a USB drive.
The USB drive must be present before you try 1. Insert your USB drive into the USB Port on
to store the Set. the frame. You must wait 5 seconds for the
switcher to recognise the USB drive.
Note: If you are updating an older setup file, you must perform
a Recall All followed by a Store All. This updates the setup files 2. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
the latest format. You can then make changes and store to System > Load Sets.
individual registers if needed.

Tip: The switcher provides 10 empty sets by default. Additional

sets can be created if you rename the sets on the USB from a
separate computer.

1. Insert a USB drive into the USB Port on the

frame. You must wait 5 seconds for the
switcher to recognise the USB drive. Tip: You can import a switcher set from your local
computer in the Import Set to Frame area. Click Import
2. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration > From... and navigate to the folder where the set is stored
System > Save Sets. and click Open. Click Import.

3. Click an Available Set button to select the

set you want to load the switcher register
from. If there is only one set on the USB then
these buttons will not be present.

50 • Switcher Sets — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

4. Click a Load button to load that register.
Only those registers that are present in the
set are shown.
• All — recall all registers from the set.
• Memories — recall only the memory
registers from the set.
• Customs — recall only the custom
control registers from the set.
• Installation — recall only the installation
registers from the set.
• Personality — recall only the personality
registers from the set.
5. Click Yes.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Switcher Sets • 51

 Media-Store Tip: You can play an animation manually from a control panel
by selecting the source button for the Media-Store channel with
the animation you want to play, and pressing Run on the3-knob
The MediaManager interface to the Media-Store menu. The knob changes to Stop as the animation is playing.
allows you to load stills, animations, or audio
files from the USB drive and make them Keep the following in mind:
available across all MEs. Two channels of Media
-Store with alpha, or four channels without Keep the following in mind when working with
alpha, are provided. Media-Store animations:
• When you load an animation to an off-air
Tip: The legacy web version of MediaManager can still be
accessed by using the Google Chrome™ browser to navigate to Media-Store channel, or the animation goes
the IP address of the frame. The Disable Web Media Manager off-air with a transition, the preview shows
setting must be Off (Click Navigation Menu > Configuration > the cut point (CutFr) for that animation, and
System > Global) to access the legacy MediaManager. The frame
not the first frame of the video.
must be restarted for the change to be applied.
• You can manually cycle through frames by
turning the Run knob while the animation
Keep the following in mind: is stopped.
Keep the following in mind when working with • Double-pressing the Run knob stops playback
Media-Store: and re-cues the animation to the first frame.
• A still, animation, or audio can be loaded • You can shuttle forwards and backwards
either by browsing the file system, or by through the animation by turning the
entering the still number using the pattern positioner clockwise or anti-clockwise when
buttons. the animation is stopped, if your control
• You can clear a Media-Store channel by panel has a positioner with a z-axis. Shuttle
loading media number 000. speed is increased and decreased by turning
the positioner more or less in each direction.
• If you are loading an Auto Key into a Media
-Store channel, you must have another Media • You can run or stop an animation by pressing
-Store channel associated with the current the positioner button, if your control panel
one to load the alpha into. has a positioner with a button.
• An FTP connection using RossLinq can be
created from an external device directly to Working With Media-Store Audio
a Media-Store channel on the switcher. Audio can be added to the playout of a Media
• If you delete a media item from the USB, you -Store channel either by loading the file directly,
may have to load that media item into a or by naming the audio file the same as the
Media-Store channel for the switcher to animation or still you want it to play out with.
prompt you to delete the media item from When you load the still or animation, the
the database. switcher will automatically load the audio file
• If you delete or rename a media item on the of the same name.
USB while it is still inserted into the switcher,
you must attempt to load the old file to clear Keep the following in mind:
that entry from the database.
Keep the following in mind when working with
• The legacy web version of MediaManager Media-Store audio:
still supports playlists.
• Media-Store audio is available to the audio
Working With Media-Store mixer and the AES outputs on the frame.
• Audio files must be 20-bit or 24-bit wav files
Animations at a 48kHz sample rate.
Media-Store animations can be used for • Audio files must be in the same folder and
animated backgrounds, branding "bugs", or have the same name as the still or animation
media transitions. You can set up an animation they are to be associated with.
to loop, play automatically when taken on-air, • An audio file does not need to be of the same
play in reverse, or even play at different speeds. length as the animation it is associated with.

52 • Media-Store — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

 • A still with audio or audio only have the Auto Note: Media items must be created in the same color gamut
Play and Looping attributes. These apply to and dynamic range that they are intended to be used in on the
the audio playout. switcher. If a media item is created in one color space and the
switcher is operating in another, the media item may not appear
• The looping time of an animation with audio correctly.
is the length of the animation.
• A Media-Store channel can be loaded with 1. Insert your USB drive into the USB Port on
Audio only. the switcher. You must wait 5 seconds for
the switcher to recognise the USB drive.
Media-Store File Specifications If the files on your USB are new, it takes
about 2 seconds per file for the switcher to
Media items can be in TGA, PNG, or JPG file generate the thumbnail for the
formats. For animations, the files must be MediaManager. Once all the thumbnails are
numbered to indicate the order they go in, and generated, they are displayed in the
the name and the number must be separated MediaManager window.
with an underscore. For audio, 20-bit or 24-bit
WAV files of the same name as the still or 2. Click Navigation Menu > MediaManager
animation are used to associate audio with a Tip: The MediaManager can also be accessed from Live
still or animation. Assist (Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist > Media >
MediaManager). The Live Assist version follows Media-Store
For example, the following files are treated as source selections on the panel.
a single animation named Anim that is 100
frames long:
• Anim_001.tga
• Anim_002.tga
• Anim_003.tga
• ...
• Anim_100.tga
3. Navigate to the folder containing the media
Note: Media items must be created in the same color gamut item you want to load into a Media-Store
and dynamic range that they are intended to be used in on the channel.
switcher. If a media item is created in one color space and the
switcher is operating in another, the media item may not appear Note: The first time you navigate to a folder it may take a
correctly. few moments for the Media-Store to scan the files and build
the database entries.
Note: An animation must start with _001 at the end of the
name of the first frame. Tip: You can upload a media item from your computer to
the selected folder on the USB. In the Still Upload area click
Important: Files names cannot contain symbols such Browse and navigate to the media item you want to upload
as ! @ # & * ( ) / , ? ' " and cannot start with an to the USB. Click Open and then Upload File.
underscore (_).
All the media items in that folder are shown
in the center area of the page.
Loading Stills or Animations 4. Drag the media item onto the Media-Store
Stills or animations can be loaded into Media channel you want to load it in.
-Store channels from the USB by navigating to
Tip: The film-strip symbol ( ) indicates that the media
the file in MediaManager. MediaManager item is an animation, the key symbol ( ) indicates that
creates and maintains a database of the media the media item has an alpha, and the speaker symbol ( )
items on the USB, as well as the setting for each indicates that the media item has audio associated with it,
media item and a thumbnail. or is audio only.

Note: The internal cache is used for sample images only and
cannot be used to store user stills or animations.
MediaManager Channel Control
To Load a Media Item Once a media item is loaded into a channel you
can control the playout for the media item from
Media items are loaded from the USB drive into
MediaManager.
a Media-Store channel from MediaManager

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Media-Store • 53

 Note: Playlists are not supported by MediaManager in Tip: At the top of the Item Details frame the title indicates if
DashBoard at this time. the information shown applies to the media item loaded into
the media channel (MX), or is from the media item in the
database (Database).

Buttons:
• Autoplay — play the animation automatically
when the Media-Store channel is taken
on-air.
Tip: The background of the channel areas tallies the on-air
status of the Media-Store channel. Red for on-air and green for • Reverse — set the animation to play in the
on-preview. forward or reverse direction.
• Mute — mute the audio associated with the
The label below the thumbnail of the media item
media item.
shows the name of the file, the number of
• Looping — set the animation to start playing
frames in the animation, and the media ID. In
again from the beginning when it reaches
this example, the name of the media item is
the last frame.
Lobster, it is 5 frames long, it is located on the
USB (U1) and has a media ID of 001. • Shaped — set the alpha to be shaped, or
unshaped when not selected.
The controls below the name allow you to set
how the animation plays out as well as eject the Fields:
current media item. • Name — the name of the media item as taken
• Play — play the animation. from the file name.
• Loop — set the animation to start playing • Width — the width of the media item raster.
again from the beginning when it reaches • Height — the height of the media item raster.
the last frame. • Alpha — shows whether there is an
• Play Direction — set the animation to play associated alpha with the media item.
in the forward or reverse direction. • Number of Frames — the number of frames
• Re-cue — re-cue the animation to the first in the animation.
playout frame. • Audio Channels — the number of audio
• Eject — eject the current media item from channels in the associated audio.
the channel. • Media Number — the media number of the
media item.
Media-Store Attributes • X-Position — set the horizontal position of
the media item.
Attributes are applied to the media item in the
• Y-Position — set the vertical position of the
database and in each Media-Store channel.
media item.
Where the attributes are being applied is shown
in the upper left corner of the area. If you adjust • Cut Frame — set the frame of the animation
the attributes of the media item in one channel, when used as part of a MediaWipe.
these settings are not applied back to the • Thumb Frame — set the frame of the
database or to other channel if the same media animation that is used for the thumbnail.
item is loaded into more than one channel. • Play Speed — set the playout speed for the
animation.
• GPO — set the GPI output that you want to
trigger by a media transition.
• GPO Time — set the time, in frames, from
the start of the media transition that the GPI
output is triggered.

Media-Store Capture
Still images can be captured from any input
BNC, as well as the program, preview, and clean
feed from any ME.

54 • Media-Store — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

To Capture a Still From the Panel
Important: A control panel is required to perform
this procedure. If you do not have access to a physical
control panel, the SoftPanel can be used. The position
of items on the menus on the SoftPanel may not
match those of a physical panel.

1. Insert your USB drive into the USB Port on

the switcher. You must wait 5 seconds for
the switcher to recognise the USB drive.
2. Press the source button for the Media-Store
channel that you want to capture a still into.
3. Press the Capt knob.
4. Press the P/B or E/E knob to select the mode
you want the Media-Store in.
• E/E — electronic-to-electronic, or record,
mode allows you to record a still
• P/B — playback mode allows you to
review your still
5. Use the P/B or E/E knob to select the video
source that you want to perform the capture
of.
6. Press NEXT.
7. Use the Alpha knob to select whether you
want to capture the alpha signal (Yes) or not
(No). You must have an input BNC selected
as the capture source to capture the alpha.
8. Press NEXT.
9. Use the Capt knob to select a number for
the still you want to capture.
10. Press the Capt knob to perform the capture.
The new media item is stored and the media
number is increased by one.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Media-Store • 55

 Custom Controls 3. Click a Macro button to select the custom
control that you want to record to. If the
custom control already has a macro
Once programmed, a custom control (CC) can recorded, the name of the custom control is
be played back by pressing a button. The custom shown in the list.
control can be as simple as triggering an output
GPI pulse, or as complex as recalling a specific 4. Click Record.
memory register on an ME, performing a Tip: The switcher can be set so that each command is
switcher transition, and selecting a group of automatically separated from the previous command by a
pause equal to the real-time delay between the you entering
keys.
commands. Press CC/UP > NEXT > NEXT and use the
You can record, edit, and run custom controls CCPause knob to select whether paused are added
from the Custom Control node in DashBoard. automatically (Record) or no pauses are added (Manual).

Refer to Custom Control Events on page 111 for The CC/UP button on the control panel, as
information on available events. well as the button assigned to the CC on the
bus, flash red when the CC is recording.
Recording/Editing Custom Controls 5. Insert the events you want to record. Events
When you create a custom control, you record can be entered from the menu or from
a series of events and special functions, that are actions directly on the control panel.
played back when you run the custom control. Each custom control can have a maximum
The process for creating a new cc and editing of 998 events, plus the End event.
an existing one are the same, except when
Note: When the switcher runs a custom control, it attempts
editing you have the option to insert events at to execute each event in the custom control as quickly as
different points in the existing cc. possible. If an event takes time to complete, the event may
not be complete before the switcher attempts to execute
Tip: Remember that some functions take time to perform and
the next event. For example, if your custom control has a
a pause should be added after the function to ensure that the
memory recall followed by a transition, a pause should be
command is completed before moving on to the next command.
added between the memory recall and the transition to
ensure that the memory is fully recalled before the
Almost any action or setting can be stored in a
transition is performed. The same applies if you want to
custom control, with the following exceptions: add events after a transition.
• Diagnostic Functions
6. Click Stop Recording to finish recording.
• Confirmation Dialogs
• Panel-Specific Functions Tip: Click Cancel if you do not want to store your events
to the custom control.
Note: It is recommended that you use a control panel for
recording custom controls.
To Edit a Custom Control
To Record a Custom Control When editing a custom control, you can delete
A basic custom control records a series of events and insert events at any point in the custom
that are played out in the same order they are control, or append events to the end.
recorded. Tip: When editing a custom control, press Run Event to run the
1. Click Navigation Menu > Custom Control currently selected event. This can help you diagnose problems
in a custom control.
> Editor.
1. Click Navigation Menu > Custom Control
> Editor.

2. Click a Bank button to select the bank that

the custom control you want to record will
be stored on. 2. Click Bank X to select the bank that the
custom control you want to edit is on.

56 • Custom Controls — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

 3. Click the custom control that you want to • You can stop all running custom controls by
edit. selecting a custom control with no events
4. Click the event that you want to edit or recorded to it.
insert an event before. • A maximum of 128 custom controls can be
run at the same time.
Refer to Custom Control Events on page 111
for information on available events.
To Run a Custom Control
5. Edit the custom control or event. Once a custom control has been recorded, you
• Append (Record) — start inserting events can run that custom control at any time.
to the end of the custom control 1. Click Navigation Menu > Custom Control
• Append — insert the current event at the > Shot Box.
end of the custom control
• Copy — copy the entire custom control
• Delete — delete the entire custom control
• Delete Event — delete the currently
selected event
• Edit Event — edit the parameters of the
currently selected event
Tip: You can also run a custom control directly from the
• Insert (Record) — start insert events control panel.
after the currently selected event
• Insert — insert the current event after Tip: The number of custom controls that are currently
running is shown at the bottom of the page.
the currently selected event
• Record — start recording a new custom 2. Click Bank X to select the bank that the
control over the existing one custom control you want to run is on.
• Run Event — run the currently selected 3. Click a custom control button to run that
event specific custom control.
The custom control starts to play
Running a Custom Control immediately.
Once a custom control has been programmed,
you can run that custom control by pressing the
Naming Custom Controls
button that the custom control was recorded to. Each custom control can be given a unique
name and mnemonic color. The name and color
Keep the following in mind: is shown on the custom control button.
Keep the following in mind when running
To Name a Custom Control
custom controls:
The procedure to name or rename a custom
• A custom control will continue to run until control is the same.
it reaches a hold event, is stopped by another
custom control, you edit a custom control, or Tip: You can also name a custom control from the Editor page.
the custom control reaches the end.
1. Click Navigation Menu > Custom Control
• When a custom control is running, the button > TouchDrive Mnemonics.
on the custom control bus is red.
• When a custom control is held (at a Hold
event), the button on the custom control bus
flashes white.
• You can run multiple custom controls at the
same time. The number of running custom
controls is shown on the display when in
custom control mode. 2. Click Bank X to select the bank that the
• You can stop a running custom control by custom control you want to name is on.
pressing the red custom control button on
the custom control bank.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Custom Controls • 57

 3. Select how you want the mnemonics on each Copying and Pasting Custom
panel row to display the mnemonics for
custom controls. Controls
• Off — the mnemonics don't change when The contents, or events, of a custom control can
the row is assigned to a custom control be copied from one custom control and pasted
bank. to another. Along with the events, the name and
• Split — the mnemonics are split (top to mnemonic settings are also copied.
cc name and bottom to bus sources)
when the row is assigned to a custom To Copy and Paste a Custom Control
control bank. Copy the contents of a custom control from one
• Full — the mnemonics are show only the button to another.
names of the custom controls when the 1. Click Navigation Menu > Custom Control
row is assigned to a custom control bank. > Editor.
4. Click the custom control that you want to 2. Click Bank X to select the bank that the
name. custom control you want to copy is on.
3. Click the custom control that you want to
copy.
4. Click Copy.
5. Select the custom control that you want to
paste into.
Setting Description

Name Enter a new name for the selected

custom control.

Text Click a Foreground button to select the

color you want to apply to the text on
the mnemonic. 6. Click Copy.
Background Click a Background button to select the
color you want to apply to the
background on the mnemonic.

Deleting Custom Controls

Any custom control on the switcher can be
deleted to remove unused customs to free up
space for new custom controls.

To Delete a Custom Control

Deleting a custom control from the switcher.
There is no undo for this delete function.
1. Click Navigation Menu > Custom Control
> Editor.
2. Click Bank X to select the bank that the
custom control you want to delete is on.
3. Click the custom control button that you
want to delete.
4. Click Delete.
5. Click Delete to delete the custom control.

58 • Custom Controls — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Network Connections Note: DashBoard must be running on a computer/panel on the
same subnet as the frame to connect.

The switcher requires a network connection for You need the IP address of the frame to connect
the DashBoard interface as well as any control to it from DashBoard.
panel you want to use. 1. Click File > New > TCP/IP DashBoard
DashBoard can be run on a remote computer, Connect or openGear Device.
or from the TouchDrive control panel. The
Carbonite Black control panels still require a
separate DashBoard computer.
Note: Refer to the documentation that came with DashBoard
or your control panel for setup information.

The switcher uses the following network ports:

• FTP — 21
• SSH — 22
• DashBoard — 5253
• SLP — 427 2. In the IP Address field, enter the IP address
• Web Server — 80 of the frame. The default IP address is
• RossTalk — 7788 192.168.0.123.
3. In the Display Name field, enter the name
Network Setup you want to use to identify the frame in
DashBoard. This should be a unique name
The frame comes from the factory set with a for the frame you are setting up.
static IP address (192.168.0.123) but can be set
4. Select OGP.
to use DHCP to automatically obtain an IP
address or to a different static IP address. You 5. In the Port field, enter the port you want to
must connect to the frame from DashBoard to connect to on the frame. The port you
set a different static IP address. connect to assigns the relationship the
DashBoard connection has to the frame.
Note: If you use a DHCP server, it must be set to always give
the frame the same IP address. DashBoard and the control panel Tip: Multiple DashBoard connections can use the same
need a fixed IP address to connect to. port, but they will mirror each other. For example, you can
connect a control panel and a separate DashBoard
Tip: If you do not know the IP address of the frame, you can set computer to the Main Panel port to give control from the
DIP switch on the frame to set the IP address to 192.168.0.123. panel and DashBoard.
The frame must be re-started for the new IP address to be
applied. Remember to set the DIP switch back once you have set • Main Panel — 5253
the new IP address. • Satellite 1 — 5255
The legacy web-based MediaManager is accessed • Satellite 2 — 5256
from a browser directed to the IP address of the • Satellite 3/SoftPanel — 5257
switcher frame. You can disable this Tip: Refer to MultiPanel on page 101 for information on
functionality by turning Disable Web Media setting up a MultiPanel system.
Manager to On (Click Navigation Menu >
Configuration > System > Global). This does 6. Click Finish.
not change the functionality if the The frame appears in the Tree View.
MediaManager in DashBoard. The frame must
be restarted for the change to be applied. To Change the IP Address
Change the IP address of the frame from
To Connect DashBoard to the Frame DashBoard.
DashBoard connects to the frame as the main 1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
panel, or as a satellite panel. Connecting as a Network.
main or satellite panel is selected by the port
used to connect to on the frame. All DashBoard
connections and physical panels that connect
on the same port mirror each other.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Network Connections • 59

 switcher will set these requirements
automatically based on the username.
• xpression – used when creating a
connection from a Ross® XPression
Motion Graphics System directly to the
Media-Store channels on the switcher, as
2. Enter a name in the Switcher Name field. well as any USB drive installed in the
This is the name that appears in the tree switcher
view in DashBoard. • liveedl – used to create a connection to
the LiveEDL folder on the switcher to
3. Click Edit.
download an edit decision list file form
the switcher
• user – used to create a connection to the
general storage folders on the switcher,
as well as any USB drive installed in the
4. Click a Mode button to use DHCP (DHCP), switcher
or a static IP address (Static) for the ethernet
port you are using. 4. Enter the password password.
5. For a static IP address, enter the IP address
(IP Address), subnet mask (Subnet Mask),
and gateway (Gateway) you want to use.
6. Click Update.

FTP Connection
You can create a File Transfer Protocol (FTP)
connection from a computer to your switcher.
You can use the FTP connection to copy still
images and animations to and from your
switcher as well as copy Edit Decision List (EDL)
files from your switcher.
The procedure for creating an FTP connection
from a computer varies between operating
systems and client software. Consult with the
documentation that came with your computer
for assistance with creating an FTP connection.
Tip: The FTP connection can be used to copy media items onto
the USB that is installed in the switcher.

To Create an FTP Connection

This procedure applies to Microsoft® Windows
XP® Professional and Windows® 7.
1. On your computer launch Windows
Explorer.
2. In the address bar, type ftp://IP Address
of your switcher.
You are prompted for a username and
password.
3. Type the user name for the application your
are creating an FTP connection for. Each
application has specific requirements. The

60 • Network Connections — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Video Reference Switcher Format Required Reference

1080p 25Hz 576i

The flexible reference system in the switcher 1080i 50Hz
allows you to use an Interlaced video format as
the reference to operate the switcher in a video 1080p 25Hz
format of the same frequency. 1080p 29.97Hz 480i
Choosing a progressive video format as a 1080i 59.94Hz
reference limits you to operating the switcher
1080p 50Hz 576i
only in that same video format and frequency.
For example, if you have a 1080i 59.94Hz input 720p 50Hz
reference you can operate the switcher in 720p 1080i 50Hz
59.94Hz, but not 1080i 50Hz. However, if you
1080p 25Hz
have a 720p 59.94Hz input reference, you can
only operate the switcher in 720p 59.94Hz. 1080p 59.94Hz 480i

720p 59.94Hz
Supported Reference Formats 1080i 59.94Hz
The switcher supports a number of reference
modes for both internal and external reference
The switcher allows you to use any interlaced
signals. References to 1080p 59.94Hz (A) and
video format to operate the switcher in any
1080p 50Hz (A) refer to 1080p Level A only.
format of the same frequency; however, the use
Switcher Format Required Reference of 480i or 576i (Composite Sync) reference
signals for High Definition (720p, 1080i, or
SD Formats
1080p) video modes is not recommended.
480i/480i 16:9 480i
The use of composite sync reference formats is
1080i 59.94Hz recommended for Standard Definition video
576i/576i 16:9 576i modes only, and provides stable outputs with
jitter performance in compliance with
1080i 50Hz
SMPTE-259M specifications.
HD Formats

720p 50Hz 576i Reference and Video Mode Setup

720p 50Hz The switcher supports both internal and
1080i 50Hz
external references. An external reference is
provided by an external device to the switcher
720p 59.94Hz 480i through the REF IN BNC on the frame. An
720p 59.94Hz internal reference is generated by the switcher
and can be fed out to other devices.
1080i 59.94Hz
The switcher automatically detects the reference
1080i 50Hz 576i
signal and only shows the video modes that you
1080i 50Hz can operate the switcher in that are supported
1080i 59.94Hz 480i for that reference format.
1080i 59.94Hz
To Set a Video Mode
1080pSF 23.98Hz 1080pSF 23.98Hz The Vid Mode is the video format that the
1080pSF 25Hz 576i switcher is operating in.
1080i 50Hz If you are using an external reference, ensure
1080pSF 25Hz
that a proper reference is connected to the REF
IN input BNC on the frame.
1080pSF 29.97Hz 480i
Note: You must use an interlaced reference source to have the
1080i 59.94Hz switcher operate in an interlaced reference format if you are
using an external reference.
1080pSF 29.97Hz

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Video Reference • 61

 1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration > 3. Click on the reference format you want to
Reference. output from the switcher.
The available output reference formats
depend on the video format that the
switcher is operating in. You must be in a
50Hz video format for PAL and a 59.94Hz
video format for NTSC.
4. Select the type of delay you want to apply
2. Click the Video Mode button and select the to the reference signal.
video format you want to use.
The available video modes depends on the
reference format coming into the switcher.

• V — vertical delay in lines

• H — horizontal delay in pixels
• F — frame delay in frames (NTSC/PAL
only)

3. Click the Reference Source button and 5. Click Update.

select an Internal or External reference 6. Click Yes to assign the output reference
source. synchronizer.
7. If you select an analog reference format
Output Reference Synchronizers (NTSC/PAL) you must set whether you want
to use color framing for the reference output
The output reference synchronizers allow you
(Sync) or not (No Sync).
to have the switcher output a reference signal
that other devices, such as cameras and video
servers, can lock to. Switching Field
Note: Different applications require different output reference The switching field is the field in an interlaced
formats and delay settings. Consult a facility engineer for video format that the switcher uses to transition
assistance in configuring these settings. from one video source to another. An interlaced
video format is made up of two fields, field 1
To Set Up an Output Reference Sync (odd lines) and field 2 (even lines).
The reference output allows the switcher to Note: If you are running in a progressive video format, selecting
provide a reference signal to other upstream or an even or odd fields will cause the switcher to only allow
downstream devices. If the switcher is using transitions on every second frame.
internal reference, this reference signal can be
sent to other devices so that all your equipment To Set the Switching Field
is synced to the same reference. Set the field that transitions are performed on.
1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
Note: If you are using a Frame Sync or Format Conversion
Reference. (FSFC), transitions are locked to Field 1.

1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >

System > Global.

2. Click on the Reference Output X button for

the reference output BNC that you want to
set up.

62 • Video Reference — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

2. Click a Field Dominance button to select
which field video transitions occur on.
• Field 1 — transitions occur on the odd
field
• Field 2 — transitions occur on the even
field
• Both — transitions occur on the current
field, either even or odd

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Video Reference • 63

 Switcher Modes • In a 3G mode, the Carbonite and Carbonite
eXtreme switchers only accept synchronized
1080p inputs.
The switcher mode allows you to set the features
• In a 3G, 1080p 25/29.97Hz, or 2.5 ME mode,
and resources that you want to have available
the Carbonite and Carbonite eXtreme
on your switcher. Some feature and resources
switchers do not support the use of a color
are not compatible with all switcher modes.
background as a source on a DVE or chroma
The switcher mode allows you to set the features key.
and resources that you want to have available • In a 1080p 25/29.97Hz mode, 1080p 29.97Hz
on your switcher. Some feature and resources and 1080p 25Hz are the only available video
are not compatible with all switcher modes. modes.
Table 2: Carbonite/Carbonite eXtreme Switcher Mode
Features To Set the Switcher Mode
Features MiniME MiniME MiniME MiniME 2.5 2.5 2.5
Note: Not all switcher support all modes. A restart is required
FSFC 25/29.97 3G ME ME ME
to put the switcher into the new mode.
25/29.97 3G

DVEs 4 8 8 4 8 8 4
1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
System.
Float 6* 0 0 0 0 0 0
FSFCs

2.5 MEs No No No No Yes Yes Yes

™
MiniME Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No

Video SD, SD, 1080p 3G SD, 1080p 3G

Modes HD HD 29.97, HD 29.97,
1080p 1080p 2. Click the Switcher Mode button for the
25 25 mode you want the switcher to operate in.
Source SD, SD, 1080p 1080i, SD, 1080p 1080i, • MiniME FSFC — floating FSFCs on the
Formats HD HD 29.97, 3G HD 29.97, 3G
1080p 1080p
Carbonite and Carbonite eXtreme frames.
59.94, 59.94, • MiniME — MiniME™ with standard SD
1080p 1080p and HD video formats.
25, 25,
1080p 1080p • MiniME 25/29.97 — MiniME™ with the
50 50 1080p 29.97Hz or 1080p 25Hz video
format.
ViewControl Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No
• MiniME 3G — MiniME™ with 3G video
MultiViewer 16 16 16 10 16 16 10 formats, not including 1080p 29.97Hz or
Boxes
1080p 25Hz.
• 2.5 ME — 2.5 ME with standard SD and
Note: * In the MiniME FSFC mode, the switcher cannot frame HD video formats.
sync a pSF video format on input BNC 1. All other inputs work
• 2.5 ME 25/29.97 — 2.ME with the 1080p
correctly.
29.97Hz or 1080p 25Hz video format.
• 2.5 ME 3G — 2.5 ME with 3G video
Keep the following in mind: formats, not including 1080p 29.97Hz or
Keep the following in mind when changing 1080p 25Hz.
switcher modes:
• The Standard mode only supports the
Carbonite and Carbonite eXtreme frames.
• When switching to a mode that only supports
10 boxes in the MultiViewer the unsupported
layouts are changed to the H244 layout.
• In a 3G mode, the MultiViewer output is fixed
to outputs 7 and 8 and the 1080i video
format.

64 • Switcher Modes — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Video Inputs Setting Description

Carbonite Set up the mnemonic appearance of the

External video sources come into the switcher source for the control panel you are using.
TouchDrive Refer to your control panel documentation
through the input BNCs, and internal sources for more information on setting up
are generated internally from the switcher. Icon
mnemonics.
Depending on how you want to use these video
Alpha Link an alpha video feed to the video. If the
sources, or where they come from, you may input is the video or fill for an auto key, click
want the switcher to pair them together, or the Alpha button and select the video
associate an external device with them. Pairing source you want to use as the alpha. Refer
two video sources together is usually used for to To Set Up an Auto Key Association on page
68 for information on setting up an auto
an auto select key where an external device, key.
such as a character generator, outputs both a
key video and key alpha. Associating a video GPO Assign a GPI output to a video input. The
GPI output is trigged with or before the
source with an external device allows special source is taken on-air, depending on the
control over that device to become active when Predelay setting. The GPI output can be
you select the source on a bus. used to trigger a video server to play before
taking the server on-air. Refer to GPI Device
Control on page 68 for information on
Video Input Setup assigning a GPI output to a video source.
Video inputs are separated into external sources Configure Assign an FSFC or Delay to the input. Refer
and internal sources. The external sources are to Frame Sync and Format Conversion on
page 80 for information on FSFC setup.
the video inputs coming in on the BNC and the
internal sources are generated internally from TSL Assign a TSL id to the input and set the tally
re-entries or follows, or from media generators. state. Refer to To Assign a TSL ID to a Video
Input on page 66 for information on
assigning a TSL id to an input.
To Set up an External Video Input
Panel Select one of the custom panels to be
External sources come into the switcher from Follow shown on Live Assist when the source is
other devices, such as cameras, video servers, selected. This can be used to have the
or character generators. DashBoard page for a camera control unit
displayed when the camera source is
Click Navigation Menu > Configuration > selected. Refer to Custom Page Auto Follow
Inputs > External on page 69 for information on setting up
custom panels.

To Set up an Internal Video Input

Internal sources are generated inside the
switcher, such as matte backgrounds, Media
-Store channels, and ME re-entries.
The physical inputs are listed along the side and
the various settings are listed across the top. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
Click the setting button for the source you want Inputs > Internal
to set up to view the available settings.
Setting Description

Text Apply a custom name to the source. Enter

a new name for each input you want to
identify differently. The name is used to
identify the input on the panel mnemonics
and well as on menus. If TSL id is associated
with the input, the switcher will use the
The internal sources are listed along the side
router mnemonic name over the internal and the various settings are listed across the
one. top. Click the setting button for the source you
want to set up to view the available settings.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Video Inputs • 65

 Setting Description 2. Enter a new name in the Text field for the
video input that you want to name.
Text Apply a custom name to the source. Enter
a new name for each input you want to
identify differently. The name is used to To Save and Upload a Router Mnemonic
identify the input on the panel mnemonics Names File
and well as on menus.
1. Open the Switchboard node for your IPS in
Carbonite Set up the mnemonic appearance of the DashBoard.
source for the control panel you are using.
TouchDrive Refer to your control panel documentation 2. Click the Configure Switchboard button in
Icon
for more information on setting up the upper-right corner of the window.
mnemonics.
3. Click the Save button and select the location
Alpha Link an alpha video signal to the video. The where you want to store the .nks file.
Media-Store channels have dedicated alpha
channels that cannot be changed. Refer to 4. Click Save.
To Set Up an Auto Key Association on page
68 for information on setting up an auto
5. Click the Router Mnemonics tab on the
key. Configuration node in DashBoard for the
switcher.
GPO Assign a GPI output to a video input. The
GPI output is trigged with or before the 6. Click Upload and locate the .nks file that
source is taken on-air, depending on the you just saved.
Predelay setting. The GPI output can be
used to trigger a video server to play before 7. Click OK and Continue to upload the file.
taking the server on-air. Refer to GPI Device
Control on page 68 for information on To Assign a TSL ID to a Video Input
assigning a GPI output to a video source.
Pass router mnemonic names to the switcher
Panel Select one of the custom panels to be with TSL ID data.
Follow shown on Live Assist when the source is
selected. The pages for MediaManager are The switcher accepts incoming TSL data on TCP
assigned to the Media-Store sources. Refer
port 5727.
to Custom Page Auto Follow on page 69 for
information on setting up custom panels. 1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
Inputs > External

Source Names
Each video source in the switcher can be given
a unique name. These names can be customized
for how they appear on the mnemonics by
adjusting the size or the font and the
background color. 2. Click the TSL button for the input you want
Note: If a TSL ID is assigned to a source, the switcher overwrites to assign a TSL ID to.
the source name on the MultiViewer and mnemonics with the
TSL name. If there is no TSL name, or it has not been received
yet, the source name is blank. For the labels on the MultiViewer,
a combination of the TSL name and switcher source name are
used. The new TSL name is passed from the switcher to any
downstream TSL devices.

To Set Up a Source Name 3. Click TSL ID number that you want to assign
to the selected input BNC.
Source names appear on mnemonics, menus,
and on the MultiViewer. 4. Click the TSL Tally button and select how
the sources are tallied and which mnemonic
Note: Source names are restricted to eight characters in length. name is use.
1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration > • Off — TSL tally information for the
Inputs > External if you are setting up a selected ID is ignored. TSL mnemonic
physical input, or Internal if you are setting source names are used.
up an internal input.

66 • Video Inputs — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

 • On — source tallied on the MultiViewer 3. Click the Icon button for the source you
based on the TSL input. TSL mnemonic want to customize the mnemonics for and
source names are used. click the icon you want to use.
• Tally Only — source tallied on the
MultiViewer based on the TSL input. TSL
mnemonic source names are not used.

Note: If a TSL ID is assigned to a source, the switcher overwrites

the source name on the MultiViewer and mnemonics with the
TSL name. If there is no TSL name, or it has not been received
yet, the source name is blank. For the labels on the MultiViewer,
a combination of the TSL name and switcher source name are To Customize Mnemonics for Carbonite
used. The new TSL name is passed from the switcher to any Black
downstream TSL devices.
The Carbonite control panels support three-color
mnemonics without icons.
Mnemonics 1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
The mnemonic displays on the control panel Inputs > External if you are setting up a
show the name of the video source and can be physical input, or Internal if you are setting
customized for font size, color, and in some up an internal input.
cases icons can be added. The customization 2. Click the Carbonite button for the source
that is available depends on the control panel you want to customize the mnemonics for.
you are using.
Note: The SoftPanel uses the Carbonite settings.

To Customize Mnemonics for TouchDrive

The TouchDrive control panels support RGB
color mnemonics and icons.
1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
Inputs > External if you are setting up a Setting Description
physical input, or Internal if you are setting Font Size Click Small, Medium, or Large to select
up an internal input. the size of the font used on the
mnemonic display. The larger the font,
2. Click the TouchDrive button for the source
the fewer characters that are visible on
you want to customize the mnemonics for. the mnemonic.

Color Click a Color button to select the color

you want to apply to the mnemonic. The
color is applied either to the
background or the font, depending on
the Inverse setting.

Setting Description Inverse Click an Inverse button to have the

color applied to the background (No)
Font Size Click Small, Medium, or Large to select or the text (Yes).
the size of the font used on the
mnemonic display. The larger the font,
the fewer characters that are visible on
the mnemonic.
Auto Key Setup
Foreground Click a Foreground button to select the
color you want to apply to the text and An auto key allows you to associate a key alpha
icon on the mnemonic. with a key video source in the switcher. When
the video source is selected as a keyer, the key
Background Click a Background button to select the
color you want to apply to the alpha is automatically used.
background on the mnemonic.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Video Inputs • 67

 To Set Up an Auto Key Association a hole based on the monochrome value
As well as input sources, internally generated of the alpha. Shades of gray are
sources, such as media-stores and color translated into either white or black,
backgrounds, can be set up as an auto key. giving the key a hard edge. Shaped Key
alphas are sometimes used with
1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration > Character Generators to cut very precise
Inputs > External if you are setting up a holes for the fill.
physical input, or Internal if you are setting
up an internal input.
2. Click the Alpha button for the key video GPI Device Control
source that you want to assign an alpha to. You can assign a GPI output to a video source
for basic external device control. When a video
source is taken on-air, the switcher can be set
to trigger a GPI output, with a pre-delay. The
external device can be set up to cue a clip, or
3. Click the Alpha Source button for the source load a page when it receives the GPI input
that you want to assign to the key video. trigger.
• --none-- — no alpha
To Assign a GPI to a Video Source
• White — uses internally generated white
Assign a GPI to a video source to trigger events
for the alpha
on external devices.
• XX — assign the source on the selected
input as a key alpha 1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
• BK — assign internal black as a key alpha Inputs > External if you are setting up a
physical input, or Internal if you are setting
• BG — assign the matte generator as a key
up an internal input.
alpha
• MX — assign the video on Media-Store X 2. Click the GPO button for the video source
as a key alpha that you want to assign a GPI output to.
• MEX — assign the program output of ME If you are using the GPI to control the device,
X as the key alpha the video source should be the video output
• MEX PV — assign the preview output of coming from the device.
ME X as the key alpha 3. Click the GPI output that you want to assign
• MEX CLN — assign the clean feed output to the video source.
of ME X as the key alpha
• PGM — assign the main program output
as the key alpha
• PRV — assign the main preview output
as the key alpha Note: You must have GPIs set as outputs to be able to
assign them to the video source.
• CLN — assign the main clean feed output
as the key alpha 4. In the Predelay field, enter the pre-delay
• MiniMEX — assign the output of MiniME™ time, in frames, you want to use with the
X as the key alpha GPI output.
4. Click an Alpha Mode button to select the When you transition a video source with a
alpha mode for the key alpha. GPI assigned to it, and the Roll Clip feature
is active, the switcher triggers the GPI
• Linear — switcher performs a
output, and then waits the pre-delay time
multiplicative key. The key alpha cuts a
before performing the transition. The length
hole based on the gradient values of the
of the pre-delay is usually the length of time
alpha. Shades of gray are translated into
your video server requires to start playing
transparency levels, giving the key a soft
a clip or your character generator requires
edge. Unshaped key alphas can also be
to load a page.
considered true linear alphas.
• Shaped — switcher perform an additive
key. With shaped keys, the key alpha cuts

68 • Video Inputs — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Tallies Setup Note: PaneLink must be active in Live Assist for auto follow to
function.
Tallies are simple contact closure relays that the
switcher uses to signal other devices, and users, To Assign a Page to a Custom Page Button
that a particular video source is on-air.
The custom page buttons on the Live Assist page
Typically, tallies are used to light a red light on
can be assigned any custom page or node in
a camera to show people that they are on-air
DashBoard. This allows you to quickly access
and what camera they should be looking at.
controls from another device on DashBoard
Note: Tallies are tied to the On-Air setting for the bus the source from Live Assist on your current device.
is selected on. If the bus is not set to be tallied as on-air, the
tallies for the sources selected on that bus do not trigger. Refer 1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
to On-Air Setting on page 74 for information on setting the on-air System > Live Assist.
status.

To Assign a Tally to an Input

Tallies are assigned to inputs and are trigged
when that input is selected on a bus that is
on-air or is going on-air.
1. Press MENU > Config > NEXT > Tally. 2. Click on the Address drop-down list for the
2. Press Add. custom page button you want to assign to a
page.
If you are editing, or deleting, an existing
tally, use the Add knob to select the tally and 3. Select the connection or custom panel that
press Edit, or Delete. you want to assign to the custom page
button.
3. Use the Tally knob to select the tally or GPI • All Connections — expand the list and
output that you want to set up. This is the select the device and node that you want
tally or GPI number, not the pin on the tally to assign to the custom page button. Some
connector. older DashBoard nodes from plug-ins
Note: A GPI must be set to tally mode before it can be used may not display properly on the Live
as a tally. Refer to To Set Up a GPI Output on page 92 for Assist buttons.
information in setting a GPI as a tally.
Note: Do not assign the Live Assist page to a custom
4. Use the Input knob to select the video source page on the same machine.
that you want to tally.
• Open Panels — expand the list and select
5. Use the Output knob to select the bus that the open custom panel you want to assign
you want to video source tallied for. When to the list. You must have the custom
the video source is selected on this bus, the panel running on DashBoard for it to
tally is triggered. appear in the list.
6. Press Tally to save the settings. Tip: Click Clear to remove the custom page and name
assigned to that button.
Custom Page Auto Follow
4. Click on the name field for the custom page
DashBoard pages can be assigned to custom button you are assigning a page to and enter
page buttons in Live Assist. These custom pages a descriptive name for the custom page. The
can then be assigned to video inputs allowing name appears on the button in Live Assist.
Live Assist to auto follow to these pages when
that video input is selected. For example, you
To Assign a Custom Page to Follow an
can assign a custom page to the DashBoard page
Input
that controls a robotic camera. You can then set
that custom page to follow the input from that Assign a Live Assist custom page to follow a
camera. Whenever you select that camera as a physical or internal video source.
source, Live Assist will jump to the custom page 1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
for that camera. Inputs > External if you are setting up a

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Video Inputs • 69

 physical input, or Internal if you are setting To Set Up a Pre-Tiled Source
up an internal input. The substitution table is a single table that
2. Click the Panel Follow button for the input allows you to specify a different source that
you want to assign a custom page to. should be taken when a specific source is
selected on a bus. The substitution table requires
either a MultiScreen or ME follow to be set up
between the buses to trigger the substitution.
3. Click the custom page you want to assign to Tip: When you select the Source on the ME/Bus, the Substitution
the input or click none. source is taken instead.

1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >

Substitution Table Inputs > Substitute.
A substitution table allows you to specify a
different source that will be taken on a bus
when a specific source is selected on that bus.
The substitution table requires either a
MultiScreen or ME follow to be set up between
the buses to trigger the substitution.
The substitution table can be used with the ME 2. Click New ME Sub or New Bus Sub to select
follows feature to create multilingual production the type of substitution table you want to
feeds. For example, you can have ME 2 follow set up.
ME 1 to simultaneous produce multiple feeds.
• New ME Sub — create a substitution on
When a source is selected on ME 1, the same
a MiniME™.
source is selected on ME 2. With the substitution
• New Bus Sub — create a substitution on
table you can have it that when camera 1 is
a key bus of an ME or MiniME™, or an aux
selected on ME 1 the follow will select camera
bus.
1 on ME 2 but the substitution table substitutes
camera 4 for camera 1 on ME 2. Refer to ME 3. Click the Source button and select the source
Follows on page 73 for information on setting that you want to substitute with another
up ME follows. source.
When working with a MultiScreen setup, the 4. Click the ME or Bus button and select the
substitution tables allow you to take pre-tiled area that you want the substitution to occur
sources from a CG or video server and have the on.
switcher treat them as a single source across 5. Click the Substitution button and select
multiple areas or buses. When the first tile is source you want to substitute for the
selected on MiniME™ 1, the substitution table selected one. Repeat for any addition
also selects the second tile on MiniME™ 2. substitutions you want to create.
6. Click Save.
Keep the following in mind:
Keep the following in mind when working with
substitution tables:
• When working with a MultiScreen, the bezel
compensation and data doubling setting
should be set up on the source generator.
• If you want to create a substitution for an
auto-select key, you must set up a
substitution for both the fill and the alpha.
• Selecting a crosspoint directly on a bus that
has a substitution set up for it overrides the
substitution. The substitution continues when
a new source is selected on the leading bus.

70 • Video Inputs — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Video Outputs • MEX — main program output of ME X (if
installed)
• MEX PV — main preview output of ME X
The BNC outputs can have any video source in
(if installed)
the switcher, including Media-Store channels,
aux bus, and clean feed assigned to them. • MEX CLN — clean feed output of ME X (if
installed)
• AUXXX — output of aux bus XX
Video Output Setup
• MVX — the output of MultiViewer X
You can assign a video source or bus to an • MinMEX — main program output of
output BNC. Some outputs can only be used for MiniME™ X
certain features
• MEXBg — source on background of ME
X (if installed)
To Set up a Video Output
• MEXPst — source on preset output of ME
Assign video sources or buses to the video X (if installed)
outputs.
• MEXKYV — key Y video of ME X (if
1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration > installed)
Outputs. • MEXKYA — key Y alpha of ME X (if
installed)
• MMXBg — source on background of
MiniME™ X
• MMXPst — source on preset output of
MiniME™ X
• MMXKYV — key Y video of MiniME™ X
2. Click on the Source button for the output • MMXKYA — key Y alpha of MiniME™ X
that you want to assign a source to. • MSXBg — source on background of
MultiScreen X
• MSXPst — source on preset output of
MultiScreen X
• MSXKYV — key Y video of MultiScreen X
• MSXKYA — key Y alpha of MultiScreen X
• MMCKAX — MiniME™ chroma key X
alpha
3. Click the video source that you want to
Note: The MiniME™ preset only shows the source that is
assign to the output.
selected on the preset bus for the MiniME™. This does not
• XX — input XX include keys or any video manipulation that is done if the
MiniME™ is used as part of a MultiScreen.
• BK — black
• BG — matte generator
• MX — Media-Store video channel X Output Re-Clocking and Data Rate
• MEXMW — Media-Store video channel Selection
used for MediaWipe effects on ME X (if
installed) Re-clocking allows the router to minimize any
• MEXMA — Media-Store alpha channel jitter in the output signal. The Data Rate
used for MediaWipe effects on ME X (if selection allows you to lock the router to an HD
installed) or SD output data rate, or have the router select
the data rate automatically.
• PGM — main program output of the
switcher Tip: By default, re-clocking and automatic data rate are enabled
for all outputs. You may want to disable output re-clocking to
• PRV — main preview output of the
reduce the cumulative effects of serial re-clocking along a signal
switcher path.
• CLN — clean feed for main program of
switcher

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Video Outputs • 71

 To Set Up Output Re-Clocking and Data Table 3: Last Line of Vertical Ancillary Data
Rate Selection Video Normal Strip/Pass Long Strip/Pass
1. In DashBoard, select the DashBoard node Format
under the NK-IPS node that the frame is 480i 19 21
connected to.
576i 22 24
2. Click the Card Details tab.
720p 25 25
3. Click on the output card slot that you want
to set up re-clocking or data rate selection 1080i 20 20
on. Each card supports eight output BNCs 1080p 41 41
on the back of the frame.
The current status of the card in the selected
slot is shown to the right of the illustration To Strip or Pass Ancillary Data
of the frame. If a video signal is present on Strip or pass ancillary data on video outputs.
a BNC, the Locked indicator for that BNC Video manipulation such as FSFC conversion
shows green for an SD signal, or blue for an automatically strips ancillary data from the
HD signal. video signal.
4. Select the Reclocked Enabled box for each 1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
BNC that you want to enable output System > Global.
re-clocking for.
5. Select the Auto Data Rate or Manual Data
Rate HD boxes to set how you want the
router to select the output data rate for each
BNC.
• Auto Data Rate — only Auto Data Rate
box is selected 2. Click an Ancillary Mode button to select
• HD Data Rate — only Manual Data Rate whether ancillary data is stripped or passed.
HD box is selected • N Strip — ancillary data is stripped
• SD Data Rate — both boxes are • N Pass — ancillary data is passed
de-selected unmodified
6. Click Send Configuration. • L Strip — ancillary data and some lines
of active video are replaced with black
7. On the Send Config to NK Device dialog
• L Pass — ancillary data and some lines
box, select the device that you want to send
of active video are passed unmodified
the new configuration to.
8. Click Send.
FlexiClean Clean Feed
Ancillary Data FlexiClean clean feed provides a second
program output per ME that is derived from a
Ancillary data is information such as closed
different point in the video layering than the
captioning or embedded audio that is included
standard program output. The clean feed can
in the non-active video portions of the video
be set to come before any key in the video
signal. These portions include the Horizontal
layering for an ME. This allows you to remove
Ancillary Data Space (HANC) and Vertical
particular keys without affecting the primary
Ancillary Data Space (VANC).
program output.
The switcher can be configured to strip or pass
this data from the video output. The amount of
data, and how it is stripped, depends on the
video format of the video signal.
Note: FSFCs strip embedded audio data from the video signal. Keep the following in mind:
Keep the following in mind when working with
clean feeds:

72 • Video Outputs — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

 • Recalling a memory register using MemoryAI 1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
may cause the clean feed output to look System > ME.
different than expected. MemoryAI allows
key elements to be recalled to other keys than
originally resulting in different key layering.

To Set Up Clean Feed

Clean Feed can be taken before any or all of the
keyers on an ME. This allows you to have a 2. Click an ME X Layer Mode button to turn
secondary output of an ME without any layer mode on (On), or (Off) for that ME.
branding for re-broadcast or archival.
1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration > ME Follows
System > ME.
An ME or MiniME™ can be linked to another ME
or MiniME™ so that actions performed on the
first are duplicated on the following. Linking
can only be set between areas of the same type.
You cannot have a MiniME™ follow an ME.
Tip: The ME follows can also be used with the substitution table
feature to create multilingual production feeds. For example,
2. Click an ME X Clean Feed button to select you can have ME 2 follow ME 1 to simultaneous produce multiple
which key the clean feed for that ME is taken feeds. When a source is selected on ME 1, the same source is
before. selected on ME 2. With the substitution table you can have it that
when camera 1 is selected on ME 1 the follow will select camera
The selected key, and all keys after it, are 1 on ME 2 but the substitution table substitutes camera 4 for
not included in the clean feed output. camera 1 on ME 2.

External Layer Mode Keep the following in mind:

Keep the following in mind when working with
The clean feed for an ME is used to create a
ME Follows:
composite alpha from the keyers on that ME
that is then available as a single alpha source. • You cannot have a MiniME™ follow an ME.
This allows you to output both the video and • There must be available resources for the
alpha from an ME to an external switcher. The following ME or MiniME™.
key video comes from the output of the ME and • Memories and resets are also performed on
the key alpha comes from the clean feed of the the following ME or MiniME™.
ME. • Chroma Key initialization is only performed
The alphas that are included in the layer mode on the leading ME or MiniME™. The following
output are set with the keyer buttons in the next ME or MiniME™ get the same chroma key
transition area. Toggle a keyer button on to parameters as the leading ME or MiniME™.
include the alpha from that keyer in the layer If you are substituting the source on the
mode output. following ME or MiniME™ the chroma key
When layer mode is turned on for an ME, you will not be initialized properly for that
are restricted to cut, dissolve, and wipe source.
transitions. MediaWipe and DVE transitions are • You must turn the MultiScreen off to be able
not available. to set the follows for the MiniME™.
• You cannot cascade/re-enter follows. For
Tip: To use layer mode internally, select the clean feed for the
ME that is set to layer mode as the alpha for an auto key on
example, if MiniME™ 1 is following MiniME™
another ME or a MiniME™. 2, MiniME™ 2 cannot be set to following
anything and no other MiniME™ can follow
MiniME™ 1.
To Set Up Layer Mode
Use the clean feed to output a composite alpha
of the keys on that bus.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Video Outputs • 73

 To Set Up an ME Follow
Set an ME or MiniME™ to follow another ME or
MiniME™. Actions on the first ME or MiniME™
are duplicated on the following ME or MiniME™.
1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
System > ME.

2. Click the ME XFollow or MiniME XFollow

button for the ME that you want ME or
MiniME™ X to follow.
For example, click ME 2 in the ME 1 Follow
row to have actions performed on ME 2
duplicated on ME 1.
Note: The MiniME™ follows are only available if the MiniME™
is not being used for a MultiScreen. You must turn the
MultiScreen off to be able to set the follows for the MiniME™.

Tip: Select Off to have the ME or MiniME™ not follow

anything.

On-Air Setting
Some switcher outputs can be set to be
considered on-air or not. This allows you to set
which outputs are tallied, how resource
allocation is divided, and how the Roll Clip
feature works.

To Set the On-Air Status for an Output

Set an output to be on-air to tally sources that
are selected on that bus.
1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
On Air.

2. Click an Always OnAir button for a output

to select whether the output is considered
on-air (On) or not (Off).
Tip: Setting an output to be always on-air tallies sources
that are selected on that bus, or are going to be taken
on-air with the next transition.

74 • Video Outputs — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

MultiViewer To Set Up a MultiViewer
Note: A MultiViewer must be assigned to a video output to be
The MultiViewer allows you to view multiple usable.
video sources from a single output BNC. Video
inputs or outputs on the switcher, including Note: The available layouts and feature depend on the video
format the switcher is operating in, the MultiViewer output, and
Program, Preview, and Media-Store channels, the number of boxes in the layout being used.
can be assigned to any box on the MultiViewer.
Up to 2 MultiViewer outputs are supported. 1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
MultiViewers and click the MultiViewer X
A time-clock can be added as an overlay to the button for the MultiViewer you want to set
MultiViewer showing either system time or time up.
code.

Keep the following in mind:

Keep the following in mind when working with
a MultiViewer:
• The layout is configured independently for
each MultiViewer. 2. Click the Layout button and select the
• Inputs are displayed with a red tally box arrangement of the boxes that you want to
when they are on-air. A green tally box is use for the selected MultiViewer.
displayed when the input is selected on the
Preset bus.
• When the switcher is operating in a
standard-definition video format, the
MultiViewer is shown in high-definition.
• All ancillary data is stripped from the
MultiViewer outputs.
3. Use the Transparency slider to adjust the
transparency of the background behind the
MultiViewer Output Formats source label for the selected MultiViewer.
Depending on the format the switcher is 4. Apply an overlay to the MultiViewer as
operating in, the MultiViewer may output a follows:
different video format than the switcher is
operating in. Note: The overlay feature is only available on MultiViewer
outputs 1 and 2 when a layout of less than 16 boxes is used
Switcher Video Format MultiViewer Format and the switcher is not operating in a 3G video format.
480i 1080i 59.94Hz a) Click the Overlay button and click On
576i 1080i 50Hz to turn the overlay on, or Off to turn it
off.
720p 50Hz 720p 50Hz
Tip: The overlay is primarily used for MultiViewer, but
720p 59.94Hz 720p 59.94Hz can also be used to overlay a camera shot of a
1080i 50Hz 1080i 50Hz shot-clock over the MultiViewer output.

1080i 59.94Hz 1080i 59.94Hz b) Click the Source button for the video
1080pSF 23.98Hz 1080pSF 23.98Hz source that you want to overlay over the
MultiViewer output.
1080pSF 25Hz 1080i 50Hz
c) Use the Clip slider to adjust the clipping
1080pSF 29.97Hz 1080i 59.94Hz of the overlay source.
1080p 25Hz 1080p 25Hz At 0% the overlay source is completely
1080p 29.97Hz 1080p 29.97Hz opaque, and at 100% it is completely
transparent.
1080p 50Hz 1080i 50Hz

1080p 59.94Hz 1080i 59.94Hz

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — MultiViewer • 75

 5. Click a Tally button to select how boxes on • Green Tally — turn the preview (green)
the MultiViewer are tallied. tally for the Video Processor MultiViewer
• Box — red or green border is shown box on or off.
around the outside of the MultiViewer • Red Tally — turn the program (red) tally
box for the Video Processor MultiViewer box
• Label — red or green boxes are shown on or off.
inside the label area of the MultiViewer • Border — turn the border around the
box Video Processor MultiViewer box off
• Label Reverse — the same as Label, but (Off), white (White), or black (Black).
the placement of the tally boxes is When the border is turned off, some
swapped distortion may be visible around the
edges of the box.
6. Click an FS Label button to select whether • Label — turn source labels for the Video
FSFC is shown on the source labels (On) or Processor MultiViewer box off, or on in
not (Off) when a FSFC is applied to the a selected position
source. • Label Pos — select a position for the
7. Click Shift Panel and select the panel that source label for the Video Processor
you want the MultiViewer shift to be active MultiViewer box(Bottom or Top).
on. When the Shift button is pressed on the • Display – select whether the source name
assigned control panel the MultiViewer on the label shows the internal
shows the shifted sources. mnemonic name (Swicther), the TSL
Note: The shift function can only be assigned to a single UMD name (Router), or both names
panel at a time. (Both).
Tip: If you select a source on an aux bus that does not
have a TSL UMD name, the mnemonic name is used
instead on the MultiViewer.

Tip: When the MultiViewer Shift is active, the box buttons

• Aspect — turn aspect ratio markers for
on the layout show the shifted source in brackets. the Video Processor MultiViewer box on
(Aspect) or off (Off).
8. Click on one of the Boxes buttons and set • MultiSc X — turn the MultiScreen overlay
up how that box appears on the MultiViewer Off or On. The overlay shows what
in the standard and shifted configuration. portions of the image are cropped to fit
into the output of the MultiScreen.

To Set Up a MultiViewer Clock

The clock can show the current system time or
LTC data being sent to the switcher.
• Physical — the physical inputs to the 1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
switcher. MultiViewers and select the MultiViewer
• Internal — the internally generated that you want to apply the clock overlay to.
sources of the switcher (ME, MiniME™, 2. Click the Clock button.
chroma key outputs, etc.).
3. Click a Mode button to select the type of
• Aux Follows — the aux buses.
clock you want.
• ME Follows — the background, preset,
and key buses of each ME. • Off — turns the clock off
• MiniME Follows — the background, • Timecode — displays the timecode fed
preset, and key buses of each MiniME™. to the switcher (hh:mm:ss:ff)
• Follows — the background, preset, and • System — displays the system time of the
key buses of each MultiScreen. switcher in 12-hour or 24-hour format
(hh:mm:ss)

76 • MultiViewer — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

4. For a Timecode clock, click a Frame Count
button to select whether the number of
frames for a timecode is displayed (On) or
not (Off).

5. For a System clock, click a Time Display

button to set how the time is displayed.

• 24 hr — time is displayed in 24-hour

format.
• 12 hr — time is displayed in 12-hour
format without am/pm.
• 12 hr AM/PM — time is displayed in
12-hour format with am/pm.
6. Click the Position tab.
7. Use the X Position, Y Position, and Size
sliders to position the clock and change the
size.
8. Click the Foreground Color tab and select
the color and transparency you want to use
for the text of the clock.

9. Click the Background Color tab and select

the color and transparency you want to use
for the background of the clock.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — MultiViewer • 77

 MultiScreen / MiniME™ 2. Click MultiScreen X to select the MultiScreen
you want to set up.
The MultiScreen allows you to output multiple 3. Click a Layout button to select the layout
video signals that can be combined into a single you want to use.
scene. The switcher treats the multiple outputs Note: The available layouts depend on the number of
as a single background and translates the keys screens being used by the other MultiScreen.
across the multiple backgrounds.
4. Click Yes to confirm.
Tip: For information on pre-tiled sources, refer to Substitution
Table on page 70.
5. Click a Background DVEs button to select
how DVE resources are used to scale sources
for the MultiScreen screens.
Keep the following in mind:
• Off — DVE resources are not allocated to
Keep the following in mind when setting up a the MultiScreen for scaling of
MultiScreen environment. background sources.
• The MultiScreen uses MiniME™ resources to • On — DVE resources are always allocated
provide the outputs. This allows you to have to the MultiScreen for scaling of
up to two DVE keys per screen of the background sources. This reduces the
MultiScreen. As a key crosses from one number of available DVE resources to
screen to the next, a key from either of the the switcher when a MultiScreen is
MiniME™ outputs is being used to provide the turned on.
two halves of the key. • Dynamic — DVE resources are
• MultiScreen does not support chroma keys. dynamically allocated to the MultiScreen
• The MultiScreen can either take separate for scaling of background sources if there
parts of a pre-tiled source, or scale a single is no substitution table.
source to the size of the MultiScreen output. Note: If there are no DVE resources to scale the
When you use a pre-tiled source, you must background source across the entire MultiScreen, the
assign sources to each MiniME™ that is used switcher needs a substitution table to map separate inputs
in the MultiScreen. This substitution table to the MultiScreen screens or the selected source is repeated
in each screen of the MultiScreen.
allows you to select a single source on the
MultiScreen program bus and the switcher 6. Click OK.
automatically assigns the required source to
7. Use the Offset slider to adjust the placement
each MiniME™.
of the background scaling in the MultiScreen
output.
MiniME™ Assignment
This can be used to adjust for the aspect
Each MiniME™ output is pre-assigned to a screen ratio difference between the input video
on the MultiScreen layout. MiniME™ 1 and 2 are and the MultiScreen output.
assigned to MultiScreen 1 and MiniME™ 3 and
4 are assigned to MultiScreen 2. If you select a 8. Click on the button between the two boxes
layout that uses more than two screens, the to adjust the size of the edge between those
MiniME™ resources that were assigned to two screens.
MultiScreen 2 are assigned to MultiScreen 1.

To Set Up a MultiScreen
1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
Canvases.

9. Use the Edge Distance slider to adjust the

size of the gap between the MultiScreen
screens.

78 • MultiScreen / MiniME™ — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

 • If you are using monitors for your
MultiScreen display, you can use a
positive value to compensate for the
bezel on the outside of a display.
• If you are using projectors for your
MultiScreen display, you can use the
negative value to compensate for the
amount of overlap of the projected
images.
10. If you selected a negative distance, click an
Edge Blending button to turn edge blending
on (On) or off (Off).

11. If the edge blending is on, use the

Smoothness and Gamma Correction sliders
to correct for the overlap in projected
images.
• Smoothness — adjust the appearance of
the transition area between the
overlapping images.
• Gamma Correction — adjust the gamma
correction applied to the overlapping
images to match the output of your
projectors.
12. Repeat the edge adjustment for all other
edges in your layout.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — MultiScreen / MiniME™ • 79

 Frame Sync and Format format. Only Frame Synchronization is
supported.
Conversion • In the MiniME FSFC switcher mode, the
switcher cannot frame sync a 1080pSF video
The switcher has multiple input frame format on input BNC 1. All other inputs work
synchronizer / format converter (FSFC) and correctly.
input de-interlacers that can be used to convert • The FSFCs used in the switcher conform to
video input signals to the format that the the SMPTE ST 125:2013 standard. Some older
switcher is operating in, as well as correct equipment may not fully conform to the
mistimed, or drifting, video input signal. The current standards and can send out-of-spec
frame synchronizers cannot completely correct video to the switcher which can have
badly formatted video, mistimed switches, signal unexpected results. Ensure that video coming
drops, or similar issues. into the switcher conforms to current
standards, especially with regard to 480i
Each FSFC channel maintains a separate setting
video signals with variable blanking sizes.
for different video formats. This lets you change
between video formats without losing FSFC
channel configurations. Supported FSFC Video Formats
The Carbonite frame has up to 6 FSFC channels FSFCs can only convert between specific video
that are shared between all inputs. The formats at a given frequency. The available
Carbonite MultiMedia and Carbonite+ frames conversions also depends on the switcher mode
have a dedicated FSFC channel per input. you are in.
• In a 3G mode, the Carbonite MultiMedia and
Keep the following in mind: Carbonite+ switchers support synchronized
and unsynchronized 1080p and 1080i inputs.
Keep the following in mind when working with
The 1080i inputs are converted using a
Frame Synchronizers and Format Converters:
simple line-doubler and may result in lower
• De-Interlacing strips embedded audio data, quality video.
and all other HANC and VANC data, from the • In a 3G mode, the Carbonite and Carbonite
video signal. eXtreme switchers only accept synchronized
• If a video format not compatible with the 1080p inputs.
currently defined conversion is used, the • In a 1080p 25/29.97Hz mode, the Carbonite
video image is frozen with the last MultiMedia and Carbonite+ switchers
successfully processed image frame. support synchronized and unsynchronized
• FSFCs create a one-frame delay in the video 1080p 29.97Hz, 1080p 25Hz and 1080p
output of the switcher for the video signal 59.94Hz inputs. The 1080p 59.94Hz inputs
being converted. are converted by dropping half the frames
• FSFCs strip embedded audio data from the and may result in lower quality video.
video signal. Ensure that no FSFC channels Table 4: Carbonite/Carbonite eXtreme Supported FSFC
are assigned to any input or bus you are Input and Output Formats
using with external audio mode.
• In the Carbonite and Carbonite eXtreme Input Switcher Output
frames, FSFC channels are assigned to either 1080i 59.94Hz 1080p 59.94Hz 1080p 59.94Hz
specific video inputs or bus-pairs. Each
720p 59.94Hz
bus-pair requires two FSFC for key video and
key alpha, or program and preset. Aux buses 480i
do not require bus-pairs. 1080i 50Hz 1080i 50Hz 1080i 50Hz
• If one FSFC channel in a bus-pair is turned
720p 50Hz
off, the paired FSFC channel is also turned
off. 576i
• The switcher is set to switch on the first field 720p 59.94Hz 720p 59.94Hz 720p 59.94Hz
when using Bus mode.
720p 50Hz 720p 50Hz 720p 50Hz
• Format conversion is not supported when
the switcher is operating in a 1080pSF video

80 • Frame Sync and Format Conversion — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)
Input Switcher Output Input Switcher Output

576i 576i 50Hz 576i 480i 480i 59.94Hz 480i

3
1080i 50Hz 1080p 59.94Hz

720p 50Hz 1080i 59.94Hz

480i 480i 59.94Hz 480i 720p 59.94Hz

1080i 59.94Hz

720p 59.94Hz
Notes
1
Table 5: Carbonite MultiMedia Supported FSFC Input • Converted using either a simple
and Output Formats line-doubler or 4-line interpolater and may
result in lower quality video.
Input Switcher Output 2
• Converted by dropping frames and may
1080p 59.94Hz 1080p 59.94Hz 1080p 59.94Hz result in lower quality video.
3
1080i 59.94Hz • HDMI port only.
4
1080p 50Hz
• MultiMedia port only.
1080p 50Hz 1080p 50Hz

To Set Up an Input FSFC

1
1080i 50Hz
2
1080p 59.94Hz
The conversion that is available depends on the
1080p 29.97Hz 1080p 29.97Hz 1080p 29.97Hz format the switcher is operating in and the input
1080p 59.94Hz
2 that is being converted.

1080p 25Hz 1080p 25Hz 1080p 25Hz 1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
2
Inputs > External.
1080p 50Hz
2. Click the Configure button for the input you
1080i 59.94Hz 1080i 59.94Hz 1080i 59.94Hz want to assign an FSFC to.
3
1080p 59.94Hz

720p 59.94Hz

480i

1080i 50Hz 1080i 50Hz 1080i 50Hz

3 3. Click a Type button to turn on the FSFC.
1080p 50Hz
• SDI — no FSFC is applied to the input.
720p 50Hz
• SDI-FS — an FSFC is applied to the input.
576i
4. If required, select the aspect ratio
720p 59.94Hz 720p 59.94Hz 720p 59.94Hz
conversion mode you want to use.
3
1080p 59.94Hz The options that are available depend on
1080i 59.94Hz
4 the video format that the switcher is
4 converting from and to.
480i
• Full — The video signal is scaled
720p 50Hz 720p 50Hz 720p 50Hz
disproportionately to fill the display of
1080p 50Hz the new aspect ratio. Aspect distortion
1080i 50Hz
4 occurs as the image is
4
stretched/compressed to fit in the new
576i aspect ratio.
576i 576i 50Hz 576i • Zoom — The central portion of the video
1080p 50Hz
3 signal is zoomed to fill the display of the
new video format. No aspect distortion
1080i 50Hz is introduced but the edges of the video
720p 50Hz signal may be cropped.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Frame Sync and Format Conversion • 81
 • Letter Box — Black bars are added to the Letterbox
top and bottom of a 16:9 image to display
Black bars are added to the top and bottom of
correctly in a 4:3 video format.
a 16:9 image to display correctly in a 4:3 video
• Pillar Box — Black bars are added to the format.
right and left of a 4:3 image to display
correctly in a 16:9 video format.

Aspect Ratio Conversion

Converting between standard-definition and Figure 12: 16:9 to 4:3 Letterbox Aspect Ratio Conversion
high-definition video formats often requires
converting between 4:3 and 16:9 aspect ratios. Pillarbox
The switcher support Full, Zoom, Letterbox, and Black bars are added to the right and left of a
Pillarbox conversions. 4:3 image to display correctly in a 16:9 video
In 480i and 576i video formats you can use format.
either a 4:3 or 16:9 aspect ratio.

Full
The video signal is scaled disproportionately to
fill the display of the new aspect ratio. Aspect Figure 13: 4:3 to 16:9 Pillarbox Aspect Ratio Conversion
distortion occurs as the image is
stretched/compressed to fit in the new aspect To Set an Aspect Ratio for 480i/576i
ratio.
You can only select an aspect ratio if the
switcher is operating in 480i or 576i.
1. Press MENU > Config > Input > NEXT.
2. Use the Input knob to select the input that
Figure 8: 4:3 to 16:9 Full Aspect Ratio Conversion
you want to set the aspect ratio for.
3. Use the SD ASP knob to select the aspect
ratio (16:9 or 4:3) that you want to use.
4. Press the Input knob.
5. Press the Confrm knob to assign the aspect
Figure 9: 16:9 to 4:3 Full Aspect Ratio Conversion ratio.

Zoom
The central portion of the video signal is zoomed
to fill the display of the new video format. No
aspect distortion is introduced but the edges of
the video signal may be cropped.

Figure 10: 4:3 to 16:9 Zoom Aspect Ratio Conversion

Figure 11: 16:9 to 4:3 Full Aspect Ratio Conversion

82 • Frame Sync and Format Conversion — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)
System Real-Time
Clock/Date
The switcher uses an internal clock to generate
the time for the clock overlay for the
MultiViewer.

To Set the System Real-Time Time

and Date
1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
System > Global.
2. Click Date and Time.

3. Click on the Date field and select the current

date.
4. Click on the Time field and select the current
time.
5. Click Save.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — System Real-Time Clock/Date • 83

 AES Audio Output
Audio sources from the audio mixer, clip player,
and Media-Store can be sent out the AES outputs
of the frame.
Only Media-Store channels 1 and 2, and the
MediaWipe channels can be assigned to an AES
output. Embedded audio is not available on the
AES outputs.

To Assign Audio to an AES Output

Assign an audio source to one of the AES outputs
on the frame.
1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
Outputs.
2. Click the Source button for the AES X output
you want to assign an audio source to and
select the Media-Store or MediaWipe you
want to assign to it.
Note: Not all options are available, depending on the video
format the switcher is operating in.

• --none-- — no audio source is assigned

to the AES output.
• MX — the audio from Media-Store X is
assigned to the AES output.
• MEXMW — the audio from the
MediaWipe on ME X is assigned to the
AES output.

84 • AES Audio Output — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Color Correction • Chroma Gain — adjust the chrominance
gain only.
• Luma Gain — adjust the luminance gain
Color correction in the switcher is performed
only.
by either Processing Amplifiers (Proc Amps) in
the HSL (Y-Cr-Cb) color space or by RGB Color • Hue Rotation — adjust the Hue.
Correctors in the RGB color space. Increasing the Hue Rotation turns the
color wheel clockwise, and decreasing
Both Proc Amps and RGB Color Correctors allow the Hue Rotation turns the color wheel
you to apply color correction to video on input counter-clockwise.
to the switcher, before the crosspoint, and on • Black Level — adjust the black level.
the output from the switcher. Correction applied Black level acts as a luminance offset.
to the input video is then available to all MEs.
• Gamma — adjust the luminance gamma
value.
Keep the following in mind: • Gamma Offset — adjust the luminance
Keep the following in mind when working with gamma offset.
proc amps and color correctors: • Cr Gain — adjust the gain of the Cr (red
• Color correction is additive, allowing you to color difference).
apply any combination of Proc Amp and RGB • Cr Offset — adjust the offset of the Cr.
Color Corrector based adjustment to a video • Cb Gain — adjust the gain of the Cb (blue
signal. If multiple color corrections are color difference).
applied, the correction is applied first, and • Cb Offset — adjust the offset of the Cb.
the bus-based correction is applied after that.

Proc Amp Color Correction RGB Color Correction

The RGB color correctors allow you to adjust the
The Proc Amp video correction allows you to
red, green, and blue component gain, offset, and
adjust the gain, offset, black level, and gamma
gamma of the video signal.
of the video signal.

To Apply a Proc Amp to a Video Source To Apply a RGB Color Correction to a Video
Source
A Processing Amplifier (Proc Amp) applies color
correction in the HSL (Y-Cr-Cb) color space for An RGB Color Corrector applies color correction
switcher sources. in the RGB color space for switcher sources.

1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration > 1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
ProcAmps > ProcAmp. ProcAmps > Color Correction.
2. Click the ProcAmps and Color Correctors 2. Click the ProcAmps and Color Correctors
button and select the video input or output button and select the input or output that
that you want to apply the Proc Amp to. you want to apply the RGB color corrector
to.
Tip: If correction has already been applied (ON), press
Reset to return the Proc Amp and Color Correctors to the Tip: If correction has already been applied (ON), click Reset
default values. to return the Proc Amp and Color Correction to the default
values.
3. Click an Enable button to turn the Proc Amp
on (On) for the selected video input or 3. Click an Enable button to turn the color
output. corrector on (On) for the selected video
input or output.

4. Use the sliders to adjust the video source.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Color Correction • 85

 4. Click the Component button for the
individual color component (Red, Green,
Blue) you want to adjust, or RGB for all of
them.
5. Use the sliders to adjust the color
components.
Tip: Click a Preset Color Temperature button to apply a
temperature color correction to the video.

• Gain — adjust the gain of the

component(s).
• Offset — adjust the offset of the
component(s).
• Lower Offset — adjust the lower offset
of the component(s).
• Gamma — adjust the gamma value of
the component(s).
• Gamma Offset — adjust the gamma
offset of the component(s).

86 • Color Correction — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Personality Personality Description

Sleep Mode have the switcher go into a sleep mode

Personality settings allow you to configure how after a user-defined amount of time (Sleep
Minutes) without user interaction.
you interact with the control panel and switcher, Touching any button, knob, or fader will
as well as how the buttons on the control panel wake the switcher. The switcher does not
appear. All of these settings are stored in the act on the button, knob, or fader control
Personality register. that wakes it from sleep mode. During sleep
mode, video related hardware is not
affected and video signals still pass through
Personality Settings the switcher. This setting is unique to the
control panel.
There are a number of settings for how the
• Power Save — all buttons and displays
switcher will react to different situations, or are turned off and as much power is
how switcher elements appear to the operator. conserved as possible.
All these settings are grouped together into the • Sleep — displays are turned off and
Switcher Personality. These settings include buttons light in raindrop pattern.
double-press rates and sleep time, among others. Sleep The amount of time that the switcher waits
Minutes without user input before going into sleep
General Settings mode. Setting the value to 0 (Off) prevents
the switcher from entering sleep mode. This
• Click Navigation Menu > Personality > setting is unique to the control panel.
General, or Transition for the transition
Toggle Shift Have the Shift button either be latching
settings.
(toggle) or momentary (off). When in toggle
mode, you can press the shift button and
then select a source on the shifted bus
without having to hold down the shift
button. This only affects the bus the shift
button is on. This setting is unique to the
control panel.
• Off — the Shift button only stays on as
long as you are holding it down.
Personality Description • Toggle — when you press the Shift
button it stays on until you press a
Editor Port Allow the switcher to be controlled by an source button on that bus.
external editor. The external editor can
control the switcher to perform transitions, Memory Allows you to set how the BANK button
or recall memories, among the supported Bank behaves when pressed and released. This
commands. This setting is for the frame. setting is unique to the control panel.
• On — allow the switcher to be • Normal — the keypad is used to enter
controlled by an external editor. the bank number directly, followed by
• Off — switcher ignores editor the memory (For example, to access
commands. memory 3 on bank 2, press BANK > 2 >
3.)
Button Set the overall brightness (0-100%) of all • Legacy — the next bank is selected
Brightness the buttons on any physical control panel every time the button is pressed, cycling
connected to the switcher. This setting is through all banks (For example, to
unique to the control panel. access bank 5, press BANK repeatedly
until bank 5 is selected.)
Rate Have the switcher use frames or seconds
for transition rates. Rates are entered and Memory A memory recall can be reversed by
displayed in the select selected values. This Undo pressing the memory number a second
setting is unique to the control panel. time after a memory is recalled. This is the
• Frames — transition rates are in same as pressing the UNDO button, if
frames. present on your control panel. This setting
• Seconds — transition rates are in is unique to the control panel.
seconds. • Off — pressing the memory number
again does not undo the recall.
• On — pressing the memory number
again undoes the last memory recall.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Personality • 87

 Transition Settings Personality Description
• Click Navigation Menu > Personality > ME Auto Set what action is performed when the auto
Transition. Trans transition button is pressed again during a
Double transition. This setting is for the frame.
Press • Halt Forward — the transition is halted
and then continues in the same
direction when the transition button is
pressed again.
• Reverse — the transition immediately
reverses directions when the transition
button is pressed.
• Halt Reverse — the transition is halted
Personality Description and then reverses directions when the
transition button is pressed again.
Transition Have the next transition reset to a default
background dissolve after each transition. • Cut — the transition immediately cuts
This allows you to prevent the selections back to the initial state when the
from the last transition from being transition button is pressed.
accidentally included with the next • Ignore — the button press is ignored
transition. This setting is for the frame. and the transition continues.
• No Reset — the next transition settings Key Auto Set what action is performed when the
are not changed after a transition. Trans independent key auto transition button is
• Reset — the next transition is reset to Double pressed again during a transition. This
a background only transition after a Press setting is for the frame.
transtiion.
• Halt Forward — the transition is halted
Next Have the next transition buttons on the and then continues in the same
Transition control panel latch when pressed (toggle). direction when the transition button is
This setting is unique to the control panel. pressed again.
• Reverse — the transition immediately
• Off — press and hold all the buttons
reverses directions when the transition
you want included in the next transition.
button is pressed.
All buttons must be pressed at the same
time. • Halt Reverse — the transition is halted
and then reverses directions when the
• Toggle — press a button to toggle it on
transition button is pressed again.
or off as being included in the next
transition. • Cut — the transition immediately cuts
back to the initial state when the
Remove Have a key removed from the next transition button is pressed.
Keys transition after it has been transitioned • Ignore — the button press is ignored
off-air using key Cut or Trans buttons. This and the transition continues.
allows you to transition a key off-air in an
emergency and not have it accidentally Roll Clip Set whether the roll clip feature is always
transitioned back on-air with the next on, or must be turned on manually. This
transition. This setting is for the frame. setting is for the frame.
• Off — key can remain part of the next • User — the roll clip feature must be
transition when it is independently turned on manually.
transitioned off-air. • Force — the roll clip feature is always
• On — key is removed as part of the next on.
transition when it is independently
transitioned off-air.

Background Have a double-press of the next transition Memory Button Behavior

Double background button select the background
Press and all on-air keys as part of the next Note: This feature is not available on the C1-A or C10.
transition. This setting is unique to the
control panel. The store and recall buttons next to the display
• Ignore — ignore the double-press of can be set to either select ME 1 or ME 2 directly,
the next transition background button. or select the list of MEs, MiniME™s, or
• Transition Clear — set the next MultiScreens. This is useful if you do not want
transition to include the background
and only the on-air keys. If an off-key is
the pressing of a store or recall button to select
selected as part of the next transition or de-select an ME. The selection of what is
it is deselected. included in the memory store or recall is done
by pressing and holding either of the store or
recall buttons and selecting the source buttons

88 • Personality — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

 on the keyer bus for the MEs, MiniME™s, or can be selected. Up to four (4) custom color
MultiScreens you want to include. schemes can be saved on the switcher.

To Set the Memory Button Behavior To Select a Color Scheme

1. Press Store > NEXT > NEXT. ME, MiniME™, MultiScreen, aux buses, and
keyers can be set to different colors by loading
2. Use the MemBtn knob to select whether
one of the pre-installed color scheme. This
both of the store and recall buttons act
setting is unique to the control panel.
together (Single), or as separate ME specific
buttons (Indiv). 1. Click Navigation Menu > Personality >
Color Scheme.
Memory Recall Behavior
Note: This feature is available on the C10 and C1 only.

The switcher can be set to select the current ME

as the ME memories are recalled on by default.

To Set the Memory Recall Behavior 2. In the Load Scheme area, select the color
1. Press MENU > PERS > NEXT. scheme you want to use on the control
2. Use the MESel knob to select how you want panel.
memories to recall. Tip: You can load a pre-loaded color scheme and then
• Hold — you must select the ME that the modify the colors and save it as a custom color scheme.
You cannot save your modifications back to the pre-loaded
memory is recalled on color scheme.
• Follow — memories are recalled on the
ME selected on the control panel
To Create a Custom Color Scheme
A custom color scheme can be created and used
Router Mnemonics instead of one of the pre-loaded color schemes.
The source mnemonics can display the switcher This setting is unique to the control panel.
name for the source, the router name, or both. 1. Click Navigation Menu > Personality >
Color Scheme.
To Set the Display Name for Router
Mnemonics
1. Press MENU > PERS > NEXT > NEXT.
2. Use the RtMnem knob to select how the
source names from the router subsystem
are displayed on the switcher mnemonics.
• Swtchr — only the switcher name is 2. In the Modify Scheme area, click the ME,
shown. MiniME™, MultiScreen, or aux that you want
• Router — only the router name is shown to change the color for.
• Both — switcher name is shown in Tip: Click Change All to change the color of all the areas
inverse color on the top part of the at once. They will all use the selected color.
mnemonic and the router name is shown
on the bottom part. 3. Use the color picker to select the new color
you want to use and click Ok.

Color Schemes
The buttons on the control panel glow with
different colors specific to their state, function,
and assignment. This color can be selected from
a list of pre-set color schemes, or a custom color
Tip: Click Live to have the color changes update in real
time on the control panel.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Personality • 89

 4. In the Unique Key Color area select how If a button is assigned to an ME, aux bus,
you want the keyer buttons on the control MiniME™, MultiScreen, or chroma key, you can
panel to be colored. press and hold the button to be able to select a
• Off — the keyer buttons use the same different ME, aux bus, MiniME™, MultiScreen,
color as their ME, MiniME™, or or chroma key from the key bus. If the user
MultiScreen. button is assigned to an Aux, it will allow you
to select a different Aux.
• On — the keyer buttons use the unique
colors assigned to each key. Click the key
that you want to change the color for and To Set A User Button
use the color picker to change the color. 1. Click Navigation Menu > Personality > User
Select.
5. Click a Custom X button to store your color
scheme to that location. Note: The menu only shows the user buttons that are
available on your control panel.
6. Click Yes.

Bus Maps
Any video input can be mapped to any source
button on the control panel using a bus map.
Each source button can have two inputs
assigned (a standard source and a shifted
source). 2. Click the user button that you want to assign
a function to and select the function you
To Create a Bus Map want to assign to that button.
The bus map assigns video sources to the Tip: Each row on your control panel can have a separate
buttons on the control panel. set of user button assignment. These settings are tied to
the row, and not the ME that is assigned to that row.
Note: The bus map is unique to the control panel (Main, Sat 1,
Sat 2, or Sat 3) and can only be set for that control panel.

1. Click Navigation Menu > Personality > Bus

Map.

Note: The functions that are available on your switcher

may differ depending on the options you have installed
and how your switcher is configured.

2. Click the source button that you want to

assign a source to and select the source you
want to assign to that button.
Tip: You must assign a button to the Shift function to be
able to access those source buttons on the control panel.

User Buttons
These buttons can be assigned to a number of
functions, including ME and key selections,
custom control, and memories. The number and
position of the buttons on the control panel
depend on the model of your control panel.

90 • Personality — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

GPI Control GPI Setup
Each GPI pin on the switcher can be configured
General Purpose Interface (GPI) is a high/low as either an input, or an output. By default, all
voltage signalling protocol that allows the GPIs are set as inputs.
switcher to send simple commands to an
external device, or receive commands from a To Set Up a GPI Input
device. Each pin on the GPI is set as either high
The switcher requires a Low Edge GPI input
(+5 Volts), or low (0 Volts), and it is the switching
trigger.
between high and low that sends commands to
the external device, or to the switcher. 1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
GPIO.
Note: Tally and GPI ports are located on the breakout panel for
Carbonite eXtreme.

GPI Trigger Types

There are four trigger types supported by the
switcher. These can be either output triggers,
or input triggers.
2. Click Edit for the GPI that you want to
Table 6: Trigger Types configure as an input.
Trigger Description 3. Click GPI.
Low The output level is set
Edge high, and momentarily
goes low for the trigger.

4. Click the Event button for the action you

want to assign to the selected GPI input pin.

High The output level is set Setting Description

Edge low, and momentarily --none-- No action is taken
goes high for the
trigger. CC Run a specific custom control:
a. Enter the custom control bank in
the Bank field.
b. Enter the custom control in the CC
field.
Low The output level toggles
Level from the base high level Mem Recall a memory on all MEs:
to the low level. The Recall
output signal remains • Enter the memory to recall in the
at this level until reset. Mem field.

FTB Perform a transition to black on the

program ME that also takes all keys
off-air. The source originally selected
High The output toggles on program is selected on preset
Level from the base low level
to the high level. The ME Cut Perform a background cut on the
output signal remains selected ME:
at this level until reset. • Click an ME button to select the ME,
MiniME™, or MultiScreen.

ME Auto Perform a background auto transition

on the selected ME:
• Click an ME button to select the ME,
MiniME™, or MultiScreen.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — GPI Control • 91

 Setting Description 7. For level triggers, click a Mode button to
select how you want to GPI output to act.
Key Cut Perform a key cut on the selected ME
and key: • Normal — when assigned to a video
a. Click an ME button to select the source and RollClip is active, will trigger
ME, MiniME™, or MultiScreen. with the source going on-air, and back
b. Click a Key button to select the with the source going off-air (pre-delay
keyer. values are only used when the source is
Key Auto Perform a key auto transition on the
going on-air)
selected ME, MiniME™, or MultiScreen • Tally — when assigned to a video source,
and key: will trigger with the source going on-air,
a. Click an ME button to select the and back with the source going off-air
ME, MiniME™, or MultiScreen. (RollClip and pre-delay values are
b. Click a Key to select the keyer ignored)
number.

Aux Xpt Select a video source on an aux bus:

GPI Output Triggers
a. Click the Aux button and select the
aux bus. Each video source can have a GPI output
b. Click the Source button and select assigned to it. This GPI can be used to trigger an
the video source. external device, such as a video server, to play
the cued clip when the video sources from the
video server are taken on-air.
To Set Up a GPI Output A GPI trigger can be set up to occur
A GPI output can be set as a Normal GPI output, automatically any time the video source is
or as a Tally output. As a tally output, the GPI transitioned on-air, or it can be triggered
output must be assigned to a video source. A manually.
GPI output in tally mode can still be used as a Note: The Next Button Secondary Function must be set to GPO
normal GPI output. to be able to trigger a GPI output manually using the NEXT
button on the control panel.
1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
GPIO.
Keep the following in mind:
Keep the following in mind when working with
GPI output triggers:
• The Roll Clip must be set to On to trigger a
GPI output with a transition.
• Edge triggered GPI outputs remain triggered
2. Click Edit for the GPI that you want to for the configured duration.
configure as an output. • Level triggered GPI outputs toggle between
3. Click GPO. high and low each time they are triggered.

To Assign a GPI Output to a Video Source

You can set a pre-delay, or pre-roll, that will
specify when the GPI is triggered in relation to
taking the video source on-air. This is useful for
4. Click a Level button to select whether you
VTR pre-roll delay and other situations where
want the GPI to trigger low (Low), or high
an input source is not immediately ready to be
(High).
taken to air.
5. Click a Trigger button to select whether you
want to use an edge trigger (Edge), or a level Note: The roll clip function must be set to on to trigger the GPI
trigger (Level). output with a transition.

6. For edge triggers, use the Duration (fr) 1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
slider to set the length of time (in frames) Inputs > External if you are setting up a
that the GPI edge output remains triggered.

92 • GPI Control — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

 physical input, or Internal if you are setting
up an internal input.
2. Click the GPO button for the video source
that you want to assign a GPI output to.

When you select this source on a bus, the

GPI output will trigger automatically.
Note: Not all sources can have a GPI assigned to them.

3. Click the GPO button for GPI output that you

want to assign to the selected video source.
A GPI must be configured as an output to
appear on the list.
4. In the Predelay field, enter the pre-delay
interval (in frames) that the switcher waits
after the GPI output is triggered before
taking the source on-air.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — GPI Control • 93

 Live Edit Decision Lists If Start or Both is selected, you must set the
pre-delay for the GPI.
(LiveEDL) 4. Use the PreDly knob to select the pre-delay
interval (in frames) that the switcher waits
Edit Decision Lists are files used by non-linear after the GPI output is triggered before
editing (NLE) suites to aid in post-production. starting to capture EDL data.
Your switcher can capture EDL data in a file that
you load into your NLE suite. Timecode Setup
The switcher uses timecode data to mark the
LiveEDL Setup EDL file so that it can be used in the non-linear
You can configure your switcher to trigger editing suite along with the feeds from the video
multiple GPI outputs at the start, end, or both, servers. The timecode data can be either from
of an EDL data capture to trigger video servers an external timecode generator, or internally
that are recording the feeds coming into the generated. An offset can be applied to both
switcher. The EDL data from the switcher can timecode sources.
then be paired with the feeds from the video For an external timecode, an LTC generator
servers, using the timecode data, in the NLE must be connected to the LTC port on the back
suite to edit or re-cut the show. of the frame.
Important: A control panel is required to configure
this feature. If you do not have access to a physical To Confirm External LTC Signal
control panel, the SoftPanel can be used.
If you have an external linear timecode
You can also set a pre-delay for each GPI output. generator connected to the switcher, you can
EDL data capture does not begin until the confirm that the switcher is receiving timecode
highest pre-delay has passed. This is useful when data.
the switcher needs to wait for external Important: A control panel is required to perform
equipment to become ready. The example below this procedure. If you do not have access to a physical
shows the effects of various triggering and control panel, the SoftPanel can be used. The position
pre-delay settings. of items on the menus on the SoftPanel may not
match those of a physical panel.

To Set the LiveEDL Behavior 1. Click Navigation Menu > Status

Important: A control panel is required to perform 2. Confirm that the information shown in the
this procedure. If you do not have access to a physical Timecode field matches the timecode from
control panel, the SoftPanel can be used. The position
of items on the menus on the SoftPanel may not
the timecode generator.
match those of a physical panel. If required, an offset can be applied to the
incoming timecode data.
1. Press MENU > System > NEXT > NEXT >
NEXT > LivEDL Config.
To Set Up Communications with a
2. Use the GPO knob to select the GPI output TSC-9902
that is connected to your video server.
The GPI must be configured as a GPI output Important: A control panel is required to perform
this procedure. If you do not have access to a physical
before it can be selected. control panel, the SoftPanel can be used. The position
of items on the menus on the SoftPanel may not
3. Use the Triggr knob to select when the GPI match those of a physical panel.
output is triggered.
• Off — GPI is not triggered 1. Press MENU > System > NEXT > NEXT >
• Start — GPI output is triggered at the Device Configure.
beginning of the EDL capture 2. Press the Add knob.
• Stop — GPI output is triggered at the end 3. Use the Slot knob to select SP (serial port).
of the EDL capture
4. Use the Type knob to select LTC.
• Both — GPI output is triggered at the
5. Press NEXT.
beginning and end of the EDL capture

94 • Live Edit Decision Lists (LiveEDL) — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)
 6. Use the SubType knob to select LTC_#.#. capturing EDL data until the pre-delay time has
7. Press the SubType knob. finished.
8. Press the Confrm knob to save your settings. When you stop capturing EDL data, you have
the option to delete the data, or save it to a USB
To Set the LTC Timecode Source drive. You can also connect to the switcher via
FTP and download the files directly to your
If you are using an external timecode generator,
editing suite. Use the username liveedl and
an offset, or delay, is applied to the incoming
timecode signal before it is stored in the password password to create the FTP
LiveEDL data file. If you are using an internal connection to the switcher.
timecode, the offset is the starting time that the
switcher uses for the timecode that is stored in Keep the following in mind:
the LiveEDL file. Keep the following in mind when reviewing the
Important: A control panel is required to perform
EDL data from the switcher:
this procedure. If you do not have access to a physical • When a MediaWipe is selected as the
control panel, the SoftPanel can be used. The position
transition type, the switcher records the
of items on the menus on the SoftPanel may not
match those of a physical panel. transition duration as the cut point frame
multiplied by two (2). This is to ensure that
Note: If a valid timecode signal is detected on the LTC port on the cut point is recorded accurately.
the frame, the external timecode will be used even if an internal • If you used more than one ME, or Aux bus,
timecode is set. in your shot, a separate EDL file is saved for
1. Press MENU > System > NEXT > NEXT > each ME and Aux bus. The ME re-entry is
NEXT > LivEDL Config > NEXT. shown as being selected on the first ME, and
the source selections on the second ME are
2. Use the Offset knob to select the source of
saved to the separate LiveEDL file. Aux bus
the timecode data you want to use.
information is only stored to a LiveEDL file
• Ext. — the timecode data received on the when the Aux bus is not in fixed mode.
LTC port is used
• Int. — an internal timecode is generated To Start Capturing EDL Data
3. Set the timecode offset for an External The EDL data can be stored to one of 1000
timecode as follows: LiveEDL files stored on the switcher. A separate
file is created for each ME when the additional
a) Use the LTCOff knob to select the offset,
MEs are used.
in frames, that you want to delay the
incoming timecode signal by. Important: A control panel is required to perform
this procedure. If you do not have access to a physical
4. Set the starting time for an Internal control panel, the SoftPanel can be used. The position
timecode as follows: of items on the menus on the SoftPanel may not
match those of a physical panel.
a) Use the Field knob to select the hours,
minutes, or seconds that you want to
1. Press MENU > User > LiveEDL.
adjust.
2. Use the Start knob to select the LiveEDL file
The timecode is shown in the
on the switcher that you want to store the
[HH:MM:SS] format.
EDL data to.
b) Use the Value knob to set the starting If the LiveEDL file already contains data,
time in the selected field. you are given the option to delete the data,
or save it to a USB.
LiveEDL Data Capture 3. Press the Start knob to start recording.
Capturing EDL data is manually started and
stopped from the switcher. When you select to To Stop Capturing and Save EDL Data
start capturing EDL data, and GPI outputs set to
Important: A control panel is required to perform
trigger on start are triggered. If a pre-delay has this procedure. If you do not have access to a physical
been set for the GPIs, the switcher does not start control panel, the SoftPanel can be used. The position

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Live Edit Decision Lists (LiveEDL) • 95
 of items on the menus on the SoftPanel may not
match those of a physical panel.

1. Press MENU > User > LiveEDL.

2. Press the Stop knob to stop recording.
3. Save the EDL data to a USB as follows:
a) Insert your USB drive into the USB Port
on the switcher. You must wait 5
seconds for the switcher to recognise
the USB drive.
b) Press the Save knob.
c) Press the Confrm knob to store the
LiveEDL file to the USB drive.

96 • Live Edit Decision Lists (LiveEDL) — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)
ViewControl (HD Only)
The ViewControl interface through DashBoard
allows you to coordinate the control over the
Carbonite switcher, XPression Live Graphics
System, and the BlackStorm Playout Server all
through a touchscreen interface. Through
ViewControl you can select sources, perform
transitions, and run custom controls.
To Select a Source on a Bus
Keep the following in mind: 1. Click ME 3 at the top and click the ME or
Keep the following in mind when working with MiniME™ that you want to select a bus on.
ViewControl:
Tip: If the Shift feature is active the Program and Preview
• ViewControl requires DashBoard 5.1, or later. boxes will switch to the selected ME or MiniME™.
• Only the sources assigned to the MultiViewer
boxes are available for direct selection. 2. Click the bus you want to select a source on
Custom controls can be used to select other at the lower left.
sources. 3. Click on the source (MultiViewer box) that
• The control panel does not follow key and you want to assign to the selected bus.
bus selections made on ViewControl. Tip: Click Shift to access the sources on the shifted
• The MultiViewer Shift must be set to the main MultiViewer boxes.
or satellite panel that the DashBoard you are
using for ViewControl is assigned to.
Keyer Transition Buttons
ViewControl Overview The Keyer Transition buttons allow you to
perform a cut or dissolve of the keys on the
The ViewControl interface provides quick access selected ME or MiniME™. These buttons act the
to a number of custom control buttons as well same as the Keyer Transition Buttons on the
as the transition functionality of the switcher. control panel.
Tip: The Cut buttons tallies when a key is on. Red when the key
Custom Control Buttons is on-air or blue when it is on for an ME or MiniME™ that isn't
The custom control buttons can be assigned to on-air.
any custom control on the switcher and given
unique names and icons. The button groups on
the left (shown below) are organized into
groups, or tabs. The buttons along the bottom
are constant across all tabs.

Transition Buttons
The transition buttons allow you to select what
is included in the next transition, what type of
transition is to be performed, and perform the
transition. These buttons function similarly to
Bus Selection Buttons the buttons in the Transition Area on the control
The bus selection buttons allow you to select the panel.
different buses on different ME and MiniME™
outputs of the switcher.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — ViewControl (HD Only) • 97

 2. Press the custom control button that you
To Perform a Transition want to set up.
1. Click the ME 3 button and select the ME or 3. Enter a name for the button in the Button
MiniME™ that you want to perform the Name field.
transition on.
Tip: You can change the name of a tab by selecting a
2. Click the BKGD and Key button over the button on the tab and then entering a new name in the
Preview box to select what to include in the Group Name field.
next transition.
4. Click the Bank button and select the number
3. Click Diss, Wipe, DVE, or MW to select the
of the bank you want to select a custom
type of transition to perform.
control from.
Tip: Live Assist will follow the selection to allow you to set 5. Click the CC X button and select the number
the transition parameters.
of the custom control you want to assign to
4. Click Auto to perform the transition, or Cut the button.
to perform a cut transition. 6. Navigate the files on the USB drive and click
the image you want to assign as the icon for
Custom Control Button Setup the button.

When you assign a custom control to a button, Tip: Press Default Icon to switch back to the default icon.
you can give that button a unique name and
7. Set up additional custom control buttons as
assign an icon to it. The images for the icons
required.
must be on a USB drive in the frame when you
assign them. Once assigned the icons are stored 8. Press Save when you are done setting up
in the frame and the USB can be removed. Each custom control buttons.
of the tabs can be named.
The configuration of the tabs and custom control ViewControl Setup
assignment to buttons are stored with the ViewControl can be set up to use either and
switcher personality settings. external HDMI™ converter or a direct NDI®
stream. The NDI® stream is only supported on
To Set up the Custom Control Buttons specific MultiViewer layouts.
You must assign custom controls from the
switcher to the buttons on ViewControl. Connecting ViewControl over HDMI™
If you want to assign icons to the custom control ViewControl combines an overlay image from
buttons, you must have the images you want to DashBoard with a custom MultiViewer output
use for the icons stored on a USB drive installed from the switcher to generate the interface. This
in the frame. After the images have been requires some external SDI/HDMI video
assigned you can remove the USB drive. conversion equipment, as well as a touchscreen
display.
1. Click the button.
Note: An input FSFC should be applied to the input you are
using for ViewControl.

The following connections are required for

ViewControl:

98 • ViewControl (HD Only) — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

• ViewControl is only supported in 1080p, assign functionality to the layout. Sources can be hidden
1080i, or 720p. The switcher must be from a layout by assigning black to the box. For more
operating in one of these formats for information on PanelBuilder, refer to the DashBoard
documentation.
ViewControl to operate.
• Set the output resolution of the DashBoard 3. Click the Overlay button and click On to
computer to either 1920×1080 or 1280×720. turn the overlay on.
• Use an HDMI to SDI converter to take the 4. Click the Source button for the overlay input
output of the DashBoard computer and put from DashBoard. This is keyed over the
it into a resolution that the switcher can use. MultiViewer layout.
Ensure that the resolution is not changed.
5. Use the Clip slider to adjust the clipping of
• Apply a FSFC to the input that is coming from the overlay source.
the DashBoard computer.
• Set up a MultiViewer to use a ViewControl At 0% the overlay source is completely
layout. opaque, and at 100% it is completely
transparent.
• Use an SDI to HDMI converter to take the
output of the switcher and put it into a 6. Click on one of the Boxes buttons and set
resolution that the touchscreen monitor can up how that box appears on the
use. Ensure that the resolution is not MultiViewer.
changed. 7. Click on the source you want to select for
• Connect the USB cable for the touchscreen the box.
to the DashBoard computer.
Note: The large box on the left should always be assigned
to PV and the large box on the right assigned to PGM.
To Set Up the MultiViewer for ViewControl
over HDMI™
ViewControl integrates the MultiViewer output Connecting ViewControl over NDI®
of the switcher with a graphical overlay from
ViewControl combines an overlay image from
DashBoard to provide live video in the
DashBoard with a custom MultiViewer output
ViewControl windows. The MultiViewer must
from the switcher to generate the interface. This
be configured to properly align the video for the
requires a single SDI to NDI® converter, as well
buttons on ViewControl.
as a touchscreen display.
Note: The switcher must be operating in a 1080p, 1080i, or
Important: ViewControl over NDI® is not supported
720p video format for ViewControl to operate.
on computers running the macOS® operating system
at this time.
Note: Only the Video Processor MultiViewer can be used for
ViewControl.
The following connections are required for
1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration > ViewControl:
MultiViewers and click MltViewer 1.
• ViewControl is only supported in 1080p,
1080i, or 720p. The switcher must be
operating in one of these formats for
ViewControl to operate.
• Set the output resolution of the DashBoard
computer to either 1920×1080 or 1280×720.
• Use an SDI to NDI® converter to take the
2. Click the Layout button and select a output of the switcher and make it available
ViewControl layout. to DashBoard.
• VCtrlT — (ViewControl Top) places the • Set up a MultiViewer to use one of the
boxes at the top of the screen. ViewControl layouts that support NDI®.
• VCtrlB — (ViewControl Bottom) places • Connect the USB cable for the touchscreen
the boxes at the bottom of the screen. to the DashBoard computer.

Tip: If you want to create a custom ViewControl layout,

you can use one of the other MultiViewer layouts to create
the look you want, and use PanelBuilder in DashBoard to

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — ViewControl (HD Only) • 99

 Keep the following in mind: Tip: You must select one of the NDI® layouts to be able to
select the NDI® input stream.
Keep the following in mind when working with
NDI®: 3. Click Shift Panel and select the panel that
• The NDI® converter and DashBoard computer you will be operating ViewControl from.
running ViewControl should be on the same When the Shift button is pressed on the
subnet. assigned control panel the MultiViewer
• The NDI® Access Manager from the NDI® shows the shifted sources.
Tools (https://www.ndi.tv/tools/) may be Note: The shift function must be active for the PRV and
required for the NDI® stream to appear in PGM boxes on the MultiViewer to switch to the active ME.
ViewControl.
• If required, the NDI® Access Manager must
be installed on the DashBoard computer
running ViewControl.
• When using the NDI® Access Manager you Tip: When the MultiViewer Shift is active, the box buttons
will need to add the IP address of the NDI® on the layout show the shifted source in brackets.
converter to the Remote Sources tab.
4. Click on one of the Boxes buttons and set
• You may have to restart the DashBoard up how that box appears on the
computer running the NDI® Access Manager MultiViewer.
before the NDI® stream becomes visible to
ViewControl. 5. Click on the source you want to select for
the box.
• You must set the NDI® connection in
ViewControl every time DashBoard is Note: The large box on the left should always be assigned
launched. to PV and the large box on the right assigned to PGM.

To Set Up the MultiViewer for ViewControl To Set Up ViewControl for NDI®

over NDI® Select the NDI® stream that is coming from the
ViewControl integrates the MultiViewer output switcher that has the MultiViewer video stream.
of the switcher with a graphical overlay from
DashBoard to provide live video in the Note: Refer to the documentation that came with your SDI to
NDI® Converter for information on setting it up.
ViewControl windows. The MultiViewer must
be configured to properly align the video for the 1. Click the button.
buttons on ViewControl.
Note: The switcher must be operating in a 1080p, 1080i, or
720p video format for ViewControl to operate.

Note: Only the Video Processor MultiViewer can be used for

ViewControl.

1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >

MultiViewers and click MV VP 1.

2. Click Update NDI Source List and click the

NDI® source that has the MultiViewer output
from the switcher.
Note: The MultiViewer must be set to one of the NDI®
layouts for the NDI® source selection to be available.
2. Click the Layout button and select a
3. Click Save.
ViewControl layout for NDI®.
• VCNDIT — (ViewControl Top) places the
boxes at the top of the screen.
• VCNDIB — (ViewControl Bottom) places
the boxes at the bottom of the screen.

100 • ViewControl (HD Only) — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

MultiPanel
Each frame supports up to 4 independent
control connections (Main, Satellite 1, Satellite
2, and Satellite 3/SoftPanel). Each connection
can be from a control panel, DashBoard, or a
2. Click a Main, Sat 1, or Sat 2 button to select
combination of the two. Add devices on the
whether that control connection has access
same control connection mirror each other.
to that resource.
The independent control connections are
Note: SoftPanel and Main share the same permissions.
selected by the port you connect to on the frame.
Multiple panels and DashBoard connections can Note: A control panel must have permission to at least
connect on the same port, but they will all share one ME, MiniME™, or MultiScreen.
the same permissions and mirror each other for
control.
• Main Panel — 5253
• Satellite 1 — 5255
• Satellite 2 — 5256
• Satellite 3/SoftPanel — 5257

Keep the following in mind:

Keep the following in mind when working with
MultiPanel:
• SoftPanel shares the permissions of the Main
Panel.
• The assignment of the panel ID is done from
the control panel.
• Control panel specific personality settings
are stored on the frame for the panel ID and
are not tied to the control panel.
• DashBoard automatically follows the main
panel but will ignore permissions set for the
main panel.
• If you change switcher modes, the MultiPanel
permissions may have to be set again.
• An undo of a memory recall ignores panel
permissions and will undo the last memory
recalled from any panel.
• Bus maps are specific to each control panel.
Creating or updating a bus map for one
control panel does not change the bus map
on another control panel.
• Custom controls ignore control panel
permissions and will run events on an ME,
MiniME™, or MultiScreen that the control
panel does not have permission for.

To Set Up MultiPanel Permissions

1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
System > MultiPanel.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — MultiPanel • 101

 Frame Cards Card Description

Switcher/Crosspoint Card The switcher/crosspoint

All the functional cards and power supplies in (4803AR-001A) card provides the video
switching and device
the Carbonite eXtreme frame can be removed communications for the
and replaced if required. Although the cards are switcher.
hot-swappable, any video sources or resources
provided by a card are lost when the card is
removed.
Rear Modules
CAUTION: When the frame is energized, Hazardous
Energy Levels are present on the chassis midplane >Rear modules install into the back of the frame
where I/O card resettable fuses make contact with and provide the physical connectors for two
the 15V DC supply bus. Hazardous Energy Sources input or output cards.
can cause fire or serious burns under short circuit
conditions. Access to the inside chassis areas must
be restricted to service personnel only, by use of the To Install a Rear Module
chassis door screw. The screw should be engaged to
limit access to the inside chassis without a tool. Important: Only qualified service personnel are
allowed to replace or service system boards and/or
cards.
CAUTION: Servicing within the chassis while
energized should be limited to module card or supply
installation, or defect replacement. Installation of the Note: There are different input and output rear modules. Ensure
cards should be carried at the front of the enclosure that you are installing the correct module. Input rear modules
and care should be taken to avoid any card or user are installed in the top slots and output rear modules are
contact with the resettable fuses on the chassis’s installed in the bottom slots.
midplane. All other service or repair should be carried
out off-line with the chassis in a de-energized state. 1. Locate the rear module, or blank plate, that
you want to remove.
Note: You must install the rear module in the slot before you 2. Remove the six (6) screws securing the rear
install the card. module to the frame and remove the old
rear module.
Card Description

Input Card (9807-5004) Each input card provides the

video resources for the eight
BNC connectors on the left
or right side of the rear
module.

Output Card (9807-5003) Each output card provides

the video resources for the
eight BNC connectors on the
left or right side of the rear
module.

Controller Card The controller cards provide

(2500AR-003A) two looping reference
connectors, two T-Bus
connectors, and two USB
ports; as well as the alarm
GPI. The T-Bus connectors
provide the interface to Ross
Routing Systems
components, such as the 3. Align the connectors on the back of the new
RCP-NK1 Remote Control rear module to the connectors on the
Panel and the NK-IPS
Network Bridge. The GPI
midplane at the back of the frame and insert
Alarm is not implemented the rear module into the slot.
at this time. 4. Re-install the six screws into the new rear
Ethernet Interface Card The interface card provides module to secure it in position.
(4803AR-070A) and the communications ports
GPIO/Tally Card for the control panel and
(4803AR-072A) Breakout panel; as well as
two Ethernet ports.

102 • Frame Cards — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Input/Output Cards 4. Align the card to the top and bottom guide
rails and insert the card into the slot until it
The input and output cards install into the front is firmly seated.
of the frame and provide the video resources
Important: Do not use excessive force to seat
for the input/output matrix. Each rear module the card. If the card does not fit into the slot,
can support up to two input or output cards. check the alignment of the card and the rear
module.
Note: The controller and interface cards install into the frame
in the same way as the input and output cards.
5. Rotate the ejector tabs in, towards the front
To Install or Remove a Card of the card, to lock the card into the slot.

Important: Only qualified service personnel are Power Supplies

allowed to replace or service system boards and/or
cards. The frame supports up to two 500 W power
supplies providing full redundancy. If one
Note: There are different input and output cards. Ensure that power supply fails, the other provides enough
you are installing the correct card. Input cards are installed in power to support the entire frame.
the top slots and output cards are installed in the bottom slots.

To remove a card, follow the same procedure To Install or Remove a Power Supply
in reverse.
Both the primary and redundant power supplies
1. Locate slot at the front of the frame that you install in the same way, and are both located
want to install a card into. A rear module inside the frame. To remove a power supply,
must be installed into the slot before you follow the same procedure in reverse.
can install the card. Each rear module
DANGER: Hazardous voltages are present within the
provides connections for two cards.
power supply for a short period of time after removal
2. Orient the new card so that the component from the frame. The power supply cover is intended
side is towards the power supplies. to protect the user from access to these areas, and
should not be removed. Ross Video power supplies
3. Rotate the ejector tabs on the card out. are intended to be factory serviced by qualified Ross
Video service personnel only.

Important: Only qualified service personnel are

allowed to replace or service system boards and/or
cards.

1. Ensure that the power switch on the power

supply is turned off.
2. Locate the power supply slot that you want
to install a power supply into.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Frame Cards • 103

 3. Align the edges of the power supply guides
to the guide rails in the frame.

4. Slide the power supply into the slot until it

is firmly seated.
5. Install the two retaining screws to secure
the power supply in the frame.
6. Turn the power switch on the power supply
on.

104 • Frame Cards — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Diagnostics • RossTalk Server Port — the network port
that the switcher is listening on for RossTalk
commands.
Switcher status menus and error conditions,
• TSL UMD Server Port — the network port
installed options, calibration, diagnostics, and
that the switcher is listening on for TSL UMD
logs.
commands.
• Allocated DVEs — where DVE channels are
Switcher Status allocated in the switcher.
The status menu shows information for various • DashBoard Connections — the IP addresses
components of the frame. of all the DashBoard connections to the
switcher, including panels. The port number
after the IP address indicates the role each
DashBoard connection is filling. Refer to
MultiPanel on page 101 for more information.

Switcher Logs
• Software Version — the current version of Switcher logs can be used to identify and
the software running on the switcher. diagnose problems with the switcher. Use this
• Serial Number — the serial number of the information when contacting Ross Video
frame. Technical Support.
• Engine Type — the model of frame. Notice: By downloading and sending Logs to Ross Video you
• Switcher Mode — the current mode the are consenting to share this information with qualified Ross
switcher is operating in. Video personnel. Refer to Ross Video Switchers Privacy Notice
on page iii for more information on the Ross Video Privacy
• Video Mode — the video format that the Policy, or visit rossvideo.com/privacy-policy/.
switcher is operating in.
• Video Reference Source — the source of To Copy Logs To a USB
video reference to the switcher
(internal/external). Switcher logs can be stored onto a USB to be
• External Reference — the video format of sent to technical support to diagnose problems
the external reference, if connected. with your switcher.
• Reference — status of whether the switcher Note: Logs must be copied before a reboot or power-cycle of
has locked to the reference format. the switcher, or the information in them will be lost.
• Field Dominance — the switching field. 1. Insert USB drive into the USB port on the
• Ancillary Mode — how ancillary data is frame. Wait 5 seconds after inserting the
handled (strip or pass). USB drive before using it.
• Temperature — status of the ambient 2. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
temperature in the frame. Diagnostics.
• CPU Temperature (C) — the temperature of
the frame CPU in degrees Celsius.
• FPGA Temperature (C) — the temperature
of the frame video processor FPGA in degrees
Celsius.
• Fan #1 — speed and status of fan 1 in the
frame.
• Fan #2 — speed and status of fan 2 in the 3. Click the Copy Logs To USB button to copy
frame. the switcher logs to the USB drive.
• Timecode — the current timecode being Tip: You can have logs stored directly to the USB drive.
received by the switcher. Click a Logs Direct to USB button to select Yes.

• Panel Slot — the control connection the

DashBoard interface is using (Main/Satellite). The logs have been copied into the \switcher
directory on the USB drive.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Diagnostics • 105

 Diagnostics turned on, all the tallies blink on and off
three times.
Diagnostics consist of a number of tests that are
2. Press MENU to end the test.
used to confirm the functionality of your
equipment.
To Run the GPI Input Test
Frame DIP Switches Important: A control panel is required to perform
this procedure. If you do not have access to a physical
There are a number of DIP switches inside the
control panel, the SoftPanel can be used. The position
frame that are used to diagnose the operation of items on the menus on the SoftPanel may not
of the switcher. match those of a physical panel.
Table 7: Carbonite eXtreme Frame DIP Switches
1. Press MENU > System > NEXT > NEXT >
DIP Description
Diagnostic Tests (Diag Tests on Carbonite
8 This DIP switch forces a RAM test every time Black) > NEXT > NEXT > GPI Test.
the switcher is powered on. It is in the up The second line of the menu show the state
(off) position by default.
of all GPI input pins as High or Low.
7 This DIP switch is unused and should be left 2. Press MENU to end the test.
in the default up (off) position.

6 This DIP switch is used to set the IP address To Run the GPI Output Test
of ethernet port on the frame to the default
value (192.168.0.123). It must be in the up Important: A control panel is required to perform
(off) position to set another IP address for this procedure. If you do not have access to a physical
the frame. control panel, the SoftPanel can be used. The position
of items on the menus on the SoftPanel may not
5 This DIP switch prevents software
match those of a physical panel.
upgrades. It must be in the up (off) position
to upgrade the switcher.
1. Press MENU > System > NEXT > NEXT >
4 This DIP switch is unused and should be left Diagnostic Tests (Diag Tests on Carbonite
in the default up (off) position.
Black) > NEXT > NEXT > GPO Test.
3 This DIP switch is unused and should be left All GPI outputs are turned off, and then each
in the default up (off) position. one is turned on consecutively. There is a
2 This DIP switch is unused and should be left three (3) second delay between each GPI
in the default up (off) position. output being triggered. Once the last tally
1 This DIP switch is unused and should be left has been triggered, all the GPI outputs blink
in the default up (off) position. on and off three times.
2. Press MENU to end the test.

To Run the Tally Test Error Messages

The Tally Test turns all tallies off, and then turns The switcher will show an error message on the
each tally on consecutively. There is a three (3) control panel display when a problem is
second delay between each tally being toggled detected.
on. Once the last tally has been turned on, all
the tallies blink on and off three times. The following error messages may appear on
the control panel display when starting your
Important: A control panel is required to perform switcher.
this procedure. If you do not have access to a physical
control panel, the SoftPanel can be used. The position Table 8: Switcher Error Messages
of items on the menus on the SoftPanel may not
match those of a physical panel. Error Description Solution

DDR 0 There is a problem Re-start your switcher.

1. Press MENU > System > NEXT > NEXT > Not with the switcher DDR If the problem
Diagnostic Tests (Diag Tests on Carbonite Found; memory. The switcher persists, contact Ross
Black) > NEXT > NEXT > Tally Test. DDR 1 may be used but Video Technical
Not many features will be Support for
All tallies are turned off, and then each tally Found; limited or disabled. assistance.
is turned on consecutively. There is a three or DDR 0
(3) second delay between each tally being & 1 Not
toggled on. Once the last tally has been Found

106 • Diagnostics — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

 Error Description Solution

Panel/Frame Your switcher control Connect your switcher

Mismatch panel is connected to control panel to the
the wrong frame type. proper frame and
re-start the switcher.

Upgrade Your switcher Allow the PMC

PMC? requires a Panel upgrade to proceed.
2. Click AuxX, MediaX, MiniMEX, and
Module Controller Contact Ross Video
(PMC) upgrade as Technical Support for MultiScreenX to select the buses or channels
part of a software assistance if you are that are reset with a switcher reset.
upgrade. The switcher unsure about
may be used without upgrading your Tip: Click the All button to select or de-select all the items
the PMC upgrade but switcher. in that category.
may respond in an
unpredictable 3. Click Save RState and Yes.
manner.

Unknown The frame does not Ensure that you have

To Load a Custom Reset Setting (RState)
panel recognise the control the correct control The Custom Reset Setting, or RState, is recalled
type panel. This could be panel connected to every time the switcher is powered on, or it can
Please caused by an the frame. If the be recalled manually.
upgrade unsupported panel problem persists,
being connected to download the latest 1. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist >
the frame, or a upgrade file from and Memory > RState.
problem with the force an upgrade of
panel module the switcher. Contact 2. Click Load RState and Yes.
controlled or the Ross Video Technical
Tip: Click Default RState to load the default RState
configuration files. Support for assistance
settings.
if you are unsure
about upgrading your
switcher.
Factory Default Settings
You can restore all or part of the switcher to the
factory default state. A factory default returns
Switcher Reset all installation and personality settings are reset.
If required, the switcher can be reset to return
it to a user-defined default setting (RState), or To Factory Reset the Switcher
the factory default state. A reset can be Return the switcher to the factory default
performed for the entire switcher, or individual settings.
components, such as keys. 1. Click Navigation Menu > Configuration >
System > Reset.
Custom Reset Settings (RState)
You can customize many of the default switcher
parameters and save them as a user-defined
reset settings. These custom reset settings can
then be recalled when you want to return the
switcher to a previous state.

To Save a Custom Reset Setting 2. Click a reset or clear button to return that
The Custom Reset Setting, or RState, saves how feature to the factory default sate.
you want the switcher to be configured when it • Clear Memories — clear all memory
powers up, or when you recall the RState registers on the switcher.
manually. • Clear CCs — clear all custom controls on
1. Click Navigation Menu > Live Assist > the switcher.
Memory > RState. • Default Bus Map — return the bus map
to the default mapping.
• Factory Reset — return the installation
and personality registers to the default
settings.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Diagnostics • 107

 2
Specifications Each MultiScreen consumes MiniME™ engines
to generate the output. The number of
MultiScreen outputs that are available depends
Switcher resources, video specifications, power on the number of MiniME™ engines that are
rating, and port pinouts. available.

Carbonite Resources Environmental Characteristics

The number of resources specific to your
All Switchers
switcher depends on the options installed.
Ambient Temperature Operating: 0 - 40°C (32 - 104°F)
Resource Carbonite Carbonite+ Carbonite Range Storage: -20 - 85°C (-4 - 185°F)
MultiMedia
Frame Cooling Active, Front-to-Back airflow
2D DVE Channels per ME 8/4
1
(Max/Min)

Aux Buses 8
Video Input Specifications
Chroma Keys per ME 2 (floating)
Input Specification Value
Custom Controls 256 (8 Banks × 32 CCs)
Equalization (using Belden >50m @ 3Gb/s
Max Events per CC 998
1694 cable)
1 >100m @ 1.5 Gb/s
FSFCs (Max/Min) 6/0 24
>300m @ 270 Mb/s (5°-40°C)
GPI I/Os 34
Impedance 75 ohm, terminating
Keyers per ME 4
Video Inputs, SDI SMPTE 259M/292M/424M
Matte Generators per ME 2
(non-looping)
Media-Store Channels 4
Reference Inputs Standard Definition —
Media-Store CACHE 8 GB (non-terminating, looping) analog black

Memories per ME 100 High Definition — tri-level

sync
MEs (max) 2
™
MiniME Engines 4

MultiScreen Generators 2
2 Video Output Specifications
MultiViewer Boxes 16 Output Specification Value
MultiViewer Layouts 39 Return Loss <-23dB @ 1.5GHz
MultiViewer Outputs 2 <-18dB @ 3GHz
Pattern Generators per ME 2 Rise and Fall Time 800ps ±10% (SD)
Tallies 34 240ps ±10% (HD)
SDI Video Inputs 24 Signal Level 800mV ±10%
SDI Video Outputs 10 DC Offset 0 Volts
Frame IP 192.168.0.123 Overshoot <10%
Panel/CarboNET IP 192.168.0.129 Video Outputs, SDI HD 10-bit SMPTE-292M/424M
Mode serial digital

Notes:
1
The number of DVE channels and FSFCs that
Audio Specifications
are available depends on the switcher mode you Specification Value
are in. This table assumes that all options are
Audio Depth 24-bit AES3 in HD (20-bit in
installed. SD)

108 • Specifications — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

 Specification Value Power Consumption
Channels 8 Stereo Pairs (16 channels) Table 9: Carbonite eXtreme
Output AES Graphite
File Format Multi-channel Waveform
Consumption 500W 34A 14.6V
Audio File (.wav)
Input Voltage 100 - 120V~, 220 - 240V~,
Sample Rate 48kHz
47-63Hz, 1.6A
Synchronization Locked to Video

Ports
Jitter
Specification Value

HD - Tri-Level Sync Alignment (> 100KHz) < 0.2UI

Timing (<10Hz) < 1.0UI

HD - Composite Performance not guaranteed with

Reference composite reference Serial Port
SD - Tri-Level Sync Alignment (> 1KHz) < 0.2UI The serial port supports the RS-422 transmission
Timing (<10Hz) < 0.2UI
standard in the following format:

Alignment (> 1KHz) < 0.2UI

• 38.4k Baud
SD - Composite
Reference • 8 bits
Timing (<10Hz) < 0.5UI
• 1 stop bit
• Odd Parity

System Timing Table 10: Serial Port Pinouts

• All video inputs zero time relative to Pin Signal

reference input, auto timing will correct for 1 Tx+
inputs out of time by up to +/- 0.25 line.
2 Tx-
• System delay is less than 1 line.
3 Rx+

Network Ports 4 n/c

The following network ports are used: 5 n/c

• DashBoard (OGP) — 5253 6 Rx-

• DashBoard (JSON) — 5254 7 Ground
• DashBoard Main — 5253
8 Ground
• DashBoard Sat 1 — 5255
• DashBoard Sat 2 — 5256
• DashBoard SoftPanel — 5257 GPI Port
• FTP — 21
The switcher supports 34 GPI I/Os.
• NTP — 123
• RossTalk — 7788 For Carbonite eXtreme the GPI I/O connectors
are on the breakout panel. The center pin of
• SLP — 427
each connector is common (ground).
• SSH — 22
• TFTP — 69 Tally Port
• TSL — 5727
The switcher supports 34 fixed tallies.
• Web Server 1 — 80
• Ultritouch — 5255

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Specifications • 109

 Table 11: Tally Rating Pin Tally #
Specification Value 28 26
Input Voltage 24VAC(rms)/40VDC 29 27
Maximum Current 120mA 30 28
Impedance <15 ohm 31 Common (pins 7-12, 26-30)

32 29
For Carbonite eXtreme the tally connectors are 33 30
on the breakout panel. The center pin of each
connector is common (ground). 34 31

Note: The tally pin must be connected to the proper common 35 32

to complete the circuit. For example, tally 6 on pin 7 must be 36 33
connected to the common on pin 31.
37 34
Table 12: Tally Pinouts

Pin Tally #

1 Common (pins 2-6, 20-25)

LTC Port
For Carbonite eXtreme the GPI I/O connectors
2 1
are on the breakout panel. The center pin of
3 2 each connector is common (ground).
4 3
USB Port
5 4
The USB port is located at the front of the frame
6 5
and is primarily intended for upgrades and
7 6 storing media items and switcher sets.
8 7 Connector — USB 2.0, Type-A, 10 W (5 V @ 2 A)
9 8

10 9

11 10

12 11

13 12

14 13

15 14

16 15

17 16

18 17

19 Common (pins 13-18, 32-37)

20 18

21 19

22 20

23 21

24 22

25 23

26 24

27 25

110 • Specifications — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Custom Control Events
The Custom Control editor in DashBoard allows you to add or edit events in custom controls.
Event Location Description

Ancillary Data Mode Switcher Installation > Select how the switcher will strip or pass ancillary data.
Ancillary Mode 1. Click a Value button to select how the switcher treats
ancillary data.

Audio Mixer Pan Devices > Audio Mixer Set the pan level for the selected channel on the selected device.
1. Click Audio Pan.
2. Click the Audio Mixer button and select the device you
want to send the command to.
3. Click the Channel button and select the channel you want
to send the command to.
4. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
5. Enter the new pan level in the Pan Left/Right (%) field.

Audio Mixer Volume Devices > Audio Mixer Set the level for the selected channel on the selected device.
1. Click Audio Volume.
2. Click the Audio Mixer button and select the device you
want to send the command to.
3. Click the Channel button and select the channel you want
to send the command to.
4. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
5. Enter the new audio level in the Volume (%) field.

Auto Trans Switcher > Transition > Performs an auto transition on the selected area.
ME Trans Action 1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Action button and select Auto Trans.

Bus Source Select Switcher > Bus Source Select a source on the selected bus for the selected area.
Select 1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
select a bus on.
2. Click the Bus/Keyer button and select the bus that you
want to select a source on.
3. If you selected a key bus, click a Bus button to select
whether you are selecting a source for the fill (Video) or
the alpha (Alpha) of the key.
4. Click the Source button and select the source that you want
on the selected bus.

Cancel All CC Special > Cancel All Cancel all running custom controls.

Cancel CC Special > Cancel CC Cancel a running custom control.

1. Click the Bank button and select the custom control bank
you want to cancel a custom control on.
2. Click the CC button and select the custom control you want
to cancel.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Custom Control Events • 111

 Event Location Description

Chroma Key, Initialize Switcher > Keyer > Initialize a chroma key for the selected key for the selected area.
Chroma Keyer Init 1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.

Chroma Key Color Switcher > Keyer > Select the color you want to key out for the selected key for the
Chroma Keyer Color selected area.
1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click Color and select the color you want to key out.

Chroma Key Mode Switcher > Keyer > Select the mode for a chroma key for the selected key for the
Chroma Keyer Mode selected area.
1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click a Mode button to select whether you want the chroma
key to operate in basic mode (Basic), or advanced
(Advanced).

Chroma Key Setup Switcher > Keyer > Select the various advanced chroma key settings for the selected
Chroma Keyer Param key for the selected area.
1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click the Parameter button and select the parameter you
want to adjust.
4. Click the Value button and select the new value you want
to enter for the selected parameter.

Clean Feed Switcher Installation > ME Select the clean feed location for the selected ME.
> ME Clean Feed 1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click a Before Keyer button to select whether you want the
clean feed output to be taken before key 1 (Keyer 1), key
2 (Keyer 2), or key 3 (Keyer 3).

Color Framing Switcher Installation > Select whether color framing for the reference outputs is
Reference > Color synchronized.
Framing 1. Click a Framing button to select whether color framing is
synchronized (Sync) or not (NoSync).

Cut Switcher > Transition > Performs a cut on the selected ME.
ME Trans Action 1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Action button and select Cut.

112 • Custom Control Events — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Event Location Description

DVE Freeze Switcher > Keyer > DVE Turn the DVE freeze feature on or off for the selected key for
Freeze the selected ME, MiniME™, or MultiScreen.
1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Click the Value button and select whether to freeze the
video and appearance of a key (On) or not (Off). When a
key is frozen, the DVE attribute are disabled and you can
not move the key.

DVE Key Aspect Switcher > Keyer > DVE Select the aspect ratio for the DVE key on the selected key for
Param the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click the Parameter button and select Aspect.
4. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
5. Enter an aspect ratio in the Value (%) field.

DVE Key Border Color (HSL) Switcher > Keyer > DVE Select the custom color you want to apply to the border of the
Border Color (HSL) DVE key of the selected area. Each component of the HSL color
must be inserted individually.
1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Click the Component button and select the HSL component
you want to assign a value to. A value should be applied to
all three components.
5. Enter a value for the selected component in the Value (%)
field.

DVE Key Border Color (Preset) Switcher > Keyer > DVE Select the preset color you want to apply to the border of the
Border Color (Preset) DVE key of the selected key for the selected area.
1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click the Color button and select the preset color you want
to apply to the border.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Custom Control Events • 113

 Event Location Description

DVE Key Border Switcher > Keyer > DVE Select the size of border for the DVE key on the selected key for
Param the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click the Parameter button and select Border.
4. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
5. Enter a size for the border in the Value (%) field.

DVE Key Crop (Bottom Edge) Switcher > Keyer > DVE Select the amount of cropping on the bottom edge of the DVE
Param key on the selected key for the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click the Parameter button and select Bottom Edge.
4. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
5. Enter the amount of cropping in the Value (%) field.

DVE Key Crop (Dual Edge) Switcher > Keyer > DVE Select the amount of cropping on both horizontal or vertical
Crop Param edges of the DVE key of the selected key for the selected area.
1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Click the Parameter button and select the edges you want
to crop.
5. Enter the amount of Left or Top cropping you want to apply
in the Value % field.
6. Enter the amount of Right or Bottom cropping you want to
apply in the Other Value % field.

DVE Key Crop (Left Edge) Switcher > Keyer > DVE Select the amount of cropping on the left edge of the DVE key
Param on the selected key for the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click the Parameter button and select Left Edge.
4. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
5. Enter the amount of cropping in the Value (%) field.

114 • Custom Control Events — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Event Location Description

DVE Key Crop (Right Edge) Switcher > Keyer > DVE Select the amount of cropping on the right edge of the DVE key
Param on the selected key for the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click the Parameter button and select Right Edge.
4. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
5. Enter the amount of cropping in the Value (%) field.

DVE Key Crop (Top Edge) Switcher > Keyer > DVE Select the amount of cropping on the top edge of the DVE key
Param on the selected key for the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click the Parameter button and select Top Edge.
4. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
5. Enter the amount of cropping in the Value (%) field.

DVE Key Edge Softness Switcher > Keyer > DVE Select the amount of softness to apply to the edge of the DVE
Param key on the selected key for the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click the Parameter button and select Softness.
4. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
5. Enter an amount of softness for the DVE key or border in
the Value (%) field.

DVE Key Size Switcher > Keyer > DVE Select the size of the DVE key on the selected key for the selected
Param ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click the Parameter button and select Size.
4. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
5. Enter a new size in the Value (%) field.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Custom Control Events • 115

 Event Location Description

DVE Key X-Position Switcher > Keyer > DVE Select the x-axis position of the DVE key on the selected key for
Param the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click the Parameter button and select X-Pos.
4. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
5. Enter a new position in the Value (%) field.

DVE Key Y-Position Switcher > Keyer > DVE Select the y-axis position for the DVE key on the selected key for
Param the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click the Parameter button and select Y-Pos.
4. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
5. Enter a new position in the Value (%) field.

DVE Wipe, Reset Switcher > Transition > Reset the parameters or direction and flip-flop for the DVE wipe
DVE Wipe Reset transition of the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click Reset to reset the DVE wipe parameters.

DVE Wipe Direction (Flip-Flop) Switcher > Transition > Select whether the DVE wipe reverses direction for every second
DVE Wipe Direction transition of the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
3. Click Flip-Flip.
4. Click On or Off to select whether Flip-Flop is on (On) or not
(Off).

DVE Wipe Direction Switcher > Transition > Select the direction for the DVE wipe transition of the selected
DVE Wipe Direction ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
3. Click Direction.
4. Click Forward or Reverse to select whether the DVE wipe
moves in a forward (Forward) or reverse (Reverse)
direction.

116 • Custom Control Events — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Event Location Description

DVE Wipe Pattern Switcher > Transition > Select the pattern you want to use for a DVE wipe transition of
DVE Wipe Effect the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Effect button and select the pattern you want to
use for the DVE wipe.

EmbeddedTriggers — Enable Switcher Installation > Select whether EmbeddedTriggers is enabled or not for the
Embedded Trigger > selected output.
Enable 1. Click the Output button and select the output BNC that you
want to send EmbeddedTriggers commands on.
2. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
3. Click a Value button to select whether EmbeddedTriggers
commands are inserted for the selected output (On) or not
(Off).

EmbeddedTriggers — Insert Switcher Installation > Select the custom control to insert into the EmbeddedTriggers
Trigger Embedded Trigger > message.
Trigger CC 1. Enter the custom control bank in the Bank field.
2. Enter the custom control in the CC field.

EmbeddedTriggers — Set DID Switcher Installation > Select the data identifier word (DID) you want to use for the
Embedded Trigger > EmbeddedTriggers message.
Settings 1. Click DID
2. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
3. Enter the DID value you want to use in the Value field.

EmbeddedTriggers — Set Line Switcher Installation > Select the line in the VANC that the EmbeddedTriggers message
Embedded Trigger > will be inserted on.
Settings 1. Click Line
2. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
3. Enter the line value you want to use in the Value field.

EmbeddedTriggers — Set Switcher Installation > Select the remote ID you want to use to identify the switcher
Remote ID Embedded Trigger > that the EmbeddedTriggers message is coming from.
Settings 1. Click Remote ID
2. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
3. Enter the remote ID value you want to use in the Value
field.

EmbeddedTriggers — Set SDID Switcher Installation > Select the secondary data identifier word (SDID) you want to
Embedded Trigger > use for the EmbeddedTriggers message.
Settings 1. Click SDID
2. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
3. Enter the SDID value you want to use in the Value field.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Custom Control Events • 117

 Event Location Description

Fly Key (DVE) Switcher > Keyer > Keyer Assign DVE resources (Fly) to the selected key for the selected
Fly area.
1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Click the Value button and select whether DVE resources
are assigned to the key (On) or not (Off).

GPI Output — Edge Trigger Setup Devices > GPO Set up the type of edge trigger for the GPI output.
1. Click GPO Edge Duration
2. Click the GPO button and select the GPI output that you
want to configure.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Enter the duration of the edge trigger in the Duration (fr)
field.

GPI Output — Level Trigger Devices > GPO Set up the type of level trigger for the GPI output.
Setup 1. Click GPO Level Config
2. Click the GPO button and select the GPI output that you
want to configure.
3. Click a Level to select whether the level trigger uses a high
(High) or low (Low) level trigger.

GPI Output — Mode Devices > GPO Select whether the level trigger GPI output act as a tally.
1. Click GPO Mode
2. Click the GPO button and select the GPI output that you
want to configure.
3. Click a Mode button to select whether the level trigger GPI
output, when assigned to video source, acts as a roll clip
(Normal) or as a tally (Tally) for the selected source.

GPI Output — Trigger Devices > GPO Trigger a GPI output.

1. Click GPO Trigger
2. Click the GPO button and select the GPI output that you
want to trigger.

GPI Output — Trigger Type Devices > GPO Select the type of trigger for the GPI output.
1. Click GPO Trigger Configuration
2. Click the GPO button and select the GPI output that you
want to configure.
3. Click a Trigger to select whether the GPI output uses a level
(Level) or edge (Edge) trigger.

Hold CC Special > Hold Insert a hold into the custom control.

Key, Make Linear Switcher > Keyer > Keyer Make the selected key linear on the selected area.
Make Linear 1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to make linear.

118 • Custom Control Events — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Event Location Description

Key Active Switcher > Keyer > Keyer Transition a key (or include it in the next transition) on or off-air
Active for the selected area.
1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Click the Parameter button and select a cut (Cut Key) or
auto transition (Trans Key) for the key, or have to key
included in the next transition (Include Key).
5. Click the Value button to select whether the key is
transitioned on-air / included in the next transition to go
on-air (On) or off-air / included in the next transition to go
off-air (Off).

Key Copy Switcher > Keyer > Keyer Copy the contents of one key to another key the same or a
Copy different area.
1. Click the Target ME button and select where you want to
copy the key to.
2. Click the Target Keyer button for the key you want to copy
to.
3. Click the Source ME button and select where you want to
copy the key from.
4. Click the Source Keyer button for the key you want to copy
from.

Key Invert Switcher > Keyer > Keyer Turn the key invert feature on or off for the selected key for the
Invert selected area.
1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to reverse the
polarity of the key alpha so that the holes in the background
are cut by dark areas of the key alpha instead of bright
areas.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Click a Value button to turn key invert on (On) or off (Off).

Key Mode Switcher > Keyer > Keyer Select the mode for the selected key for the selected area.
Mode 1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click a Mode button to have the key set as
shaped/unshaped from the key (Normal), as additive for
a shaped source (Additive), or alpha to fully opaque/white
(Full).

Key Only Transition Switcher > Keyer > Keyer Perform a key only transition for the selected area.
Trans 1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click the Action button and select whether they key should
perform a cut (Cut), or auto transition (Auto Trans).

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Custom Control Events • 119

 Event Location Description

Key Reset Switcher > Keyer > Keyer Reset the parameters for the selected key for the selected area.
Reset Params 1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to reset the
clip, gain, transparency, invert, and mask for.

Key Settings (Clip, Gain, Switcher > Keyer > Keyer Select clip, gain, and transparency settings for the selected key
Transparency) Settings for the selected area.
1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Enter a value for the clip, gain, or transparency for the key
in the Value field.

Key Swap Switcher > Keyer > Keyer Swap the contents of one key with another key the same or a
Swap different area.
1. Click the 1st ME button and select where the first key you
want to swap is.
2. Click the 1st Keyer button for the first key you want to swap.
3. Click the 2nd ME button and select where the second key
you want to swap is.
4. Click the 2nd Keyer button for the second key you want to
swap.

Key Trans Rate Switcher > Keyer > Keyer Set or reset the keyer transition rate of the selected area.
Trans Rate 1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Enter a new transition rate, in frames, for the key in the
Value (fr) field.

Key Type Switcher > Keyer > Keyer Assign a key type for a key for the selected area.
Type 1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click a Type button to assign the key type to the selected
key.

Layer Mode Switcher Installation > ME Select whether external layer mode is active for the selected ME.
> ME Layer Mode 1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
3. Click a Value button to select whether external layer mode
is on (On) or not (Off).

Loop CC Special > Loop Insert a loop into the custom control.

120 • Custom Control Events — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Event Location Description

Mask, Force Switcher > Keyer > Mask Apply a mask to the selected key for the selected ME.
Force 1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Click the Value button and select whether to force the area
inside the mask region to the foreground (On) or not (Off).

Mask, Invert Switcher > Keyer > Mask Invert the mask of the selected key for the selected ME.
Invert 1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Click the Value button and select whether to invert the
masked area with the unmasked area (On) or not (Off).

Mask, Reset Switcher > Keyer > Mask Reset the mask of the selected key for the selected ME.
Reset 1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click the Action button and select the parameter you want
to reset.
• Reset Type — turn mask off.
• Reset Forced — turn force off.
• Reset Inverted — turn invert off.
• Reset X-Pos — reset horizontal position.
• Reset Y-Pos — reset vertical position.
• Reset Size — reset size.
• Reset Ver Edges — reset top and bottom edges.
• Reset Hor Edges — reset left and right edges.

Mask (Box) — Bottom Edge Switcher > Keyer > Box Select the position for the bottom edge of the box mask on the
PositionMask (Box) — Bottom Mask Param selected key for the selected ME.
Edge Position 1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click the Parameter button and select Bottom Edge.
4. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
5. Enter a new position in the Value (%) field.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Custom Control Events • 121

 Event Location Description

Mask (Box) — Left Edge Position Switcher > Keyer > Box Select the position for the left edge of the box mask on the
Mask Param selected key for the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click the Parameter button and select Left Edge.
4. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
5. Enter a new position in the Value (%) field.

Mask (Box) — Right Edge Switcher > Keyer > Box Select the position for the right edge of the box mask on the
Position Mask Param selected key for the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click the Parameter button and select Right Edge.
4. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
5. Enter a new position in the Value (%) field.

Mask (Box) — Size Switcher > Keyer > Box Select the size of the box mask on the selected key for the
Mask Param selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click the Parameter button and select Size.
4. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
5. Enter a new size in the Value (%) field.

Mask (Box) — Top Edge Position Switcher > Keyer > Box Select the position for the top edge of the box mask on the
Mask Param selected key for the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click the Parameter button and select Top Edge.
4. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
5. Enter a new position in the Value (%) field.

122 • Custom Control Events — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Event Location Description

Mask (Box) — X-Position Switcher > Keyer > Box Select the x-axis position of the box mask on the selected key
Mask Param for the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click the Parameter button and select X-Pos.
4. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
5. Enter a new position in the Value (%) field.

Mask (Box) — Y-Position Switcher > Keyer > Box Select the y-axis position for the box mask on the selected key
Mask Param for the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click the Parameter button and select Y-Pos.
4. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
5. Enter a new position in the Value (%) field.

Mask (Pattern) — Aspect Ratio Switcher > Keyer > Select the aspect ratio for the pattern mask for the selected ME.
Pattern Mask Param 1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Parameter button and select Aspect.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Enter an aspect ratio in the Value (%) field.

Mask (Pattern) — Border Size Switcher > Keyer > Select the size of border for the pattern mask on the selected
Pattern Mask Param key for the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Parameter button and select Border Size.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Enter a size for the border in the Value (%) field.

Mask (Pattern) — Edge Softness Switcher > Keyer > Select the amount of softness to apply to the edge of the mask
Pattern Mask Param for the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Parameter button and select Softness.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Enter an amount of softness for the pattern or border in
the Value (%) field.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Custom Control Events • 123

 Event Location Description

Mask (Pattern) — Horizontal Switcher > Keyer > Select the number of times you want to multiply the pattern
Multiplication Pattern Mask Param mask horizontally for the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Parameter button and select Horizontal Mult.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Enter the number of times the pattern is multiplied in the
Value field.

Mask (Pattern) — Pattern Switcher > Keyer > Select a pattern for the pattern mask for the selected ME.
Pattern Mask Effect 1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Pattern and select the pattern you want to use
for the pattern generator.

Mask (Pattern) — Reset Switcher > Keyer > Reset the mask for the selected ME.
Pattern Mask Reset 1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click Reset Params.

Mask (Pattern) — Rotation Switcher > Keyer > Select the rotation for the pattern mask for the selected ME.
Pattern Mask Param 1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Parameter button and select Rotation.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Enter a rotation in the Value (%) field.

Mask (Pattern) — Size Switcher > Keyer > Select the size of the pattern mask for the selected ME.
Pattern Mask Param 1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Parameter button and select Size.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Enter a new size in the Value (%) field.

Mask (Pattern) — Vertical Switcher > Keyer > Select the number of times you want to multiply the pattern
Multiplication Pattern Mask Param mask vertically for the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Parameter button and select Vertical Mult.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Enter the number of times the pattern is multiplied in the
Value field.

124 • Custom Control Events — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Event Location Description

Mask (Pattern) — X-Position Switcher > Keyer > Select the x-axis position of the pattern mask for the selected
Pattern Mask Param ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Parameter button and select X-Pos.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Enter a new position in the Value (%) field.

Mask (Pattern) — Y-Position Switcher > Keyer > Select the y-axis position for the pattern mask for the selected
Pattern Mask Param ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Parameter button and select Y-Pos.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Enter a new position in the Value (%) field.

Mask Switcher > Keyer > Mask Apply a mask to the selected key for the selected ME.
Type 1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Keyer button for the key you want to perform the
event on.
3. Click a Mask Type button to apply a pattern mask (Pattern),
box mask (Box, or turn the mask off (Off).

Matte Color, Reset Switcher > Matte > Matte Reset the matte color for the selected ME or aux.
Color Reset 1. Click the ME/Matte button for the ME or aux that you want
to perform the event on.
2. For an ME, click the Matte button and select Matte.

Matte Color (HSL) Switcher > Matte > Matte Select the custom matte color for the selected ME or aux. Each
Color (HSL) component of the HSL color must be inserted individually.
1. Click the ME/Matte button for the ME or aux that you want
to perform the event on.
2. Click the Matte button and select Matte.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Click the Component button and select the HSL component
you want to assign a value to. A value should be applied to
all three components.
5. Enter a value for the selected component in the Value (%)
field.

Matte Color (Preset) Switcher > Matte > Matte Select a preset matte color for the selected ME or aux.
Color (Preset) 1. Click the ME/Matte button for the ME or aux that you want
to perform the event on.
2. Click the Matte button and select Matte.
3. Click the Color button and select the color you want to use.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Custom Control Events • 125

 Event Location Description

ME Copy Switcher > ME Copy Copy the contents of one area to another.
1. Click the Target ME button and select the location that you
want to copy to.
2. Click the Source ME button and select the location that you
want to copy from.

Media-Store — Auto Play Switcher > MediaStore > Select whether an animation plays automatically when taken
Attributes on-air for the selected Media-Store channel.
1. Click the MediaStore Channel button for the Media-Store
channel you want to perform the event on.
2. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
3. Click the Parameter button and select Auto Play.
4. Click the Value button and select whether the animation
plays automatically (On) or not (Off).

Media-Store — Capture Alpha Switcher > MediaStore > Select whether to include the alpha with a capture on the
Capture Alpha selected Media-Store channel.
1. Click the MediaStore Channel button for the Media-Store
channel you want to perform the event on.
2. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
3. Click the Enable button and select whether the alpha is
captured with the source (On) or not (Off).

Media-Store — Capture Switcher > MediaStore > Capture a still to the selected Media-Store channel.
Capture 1. Click the MediaStore Channel button for the Media-Store
channel you want to perform the event on.
2. Enter the number you want to assign to the capture file in
the Capture File field.

Media-Store — Capture Mode Switcher > MediaStore > Select the capture mode for the selected Media-Store channel.
Capture Display 1. Click the MediaStore Channel button for the Media-Store
channel you want to perform the event on.
2. Click a Capture Display button to select whether the
capture is in electronic-to-electronic "E/E" (End to End) or
playback "P/B" (Playback) mode.

Media-Store — Capture Source Switcher > MediaStore > Select the video source you want to capture for the selected
Media Capture Source Media-Store channel.
1. Click the MediaStore Channel button for the Media-Store
channel you want to perform the event on.
2. Click Source and select the video source that you want to
capture.

Media-Store — Clear Channel Switcher > MediaStore > Clear the selected Media-Store channel.
Channel Action 1. Click the MediaStore Channel button for the Media-Store
channel you want to perform the event on.
2. Click Clear Channel.

126 • Custom Control Events — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Event Location Description

Media-Store — Cut Frame Switcher > MediaStore > Select the point, in frames, from the start of the animation that
Attributes the MediaWipe background cut occurs for the selected Media
-Store channel.
1. Click the MediaStore Channel button for the Media-Store
channel you want to perform the event on.
2. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
3. Click the Parameter button and select Cut Frame.
4. Enter the frame in the animation that you want to cut to
occur for the MediaWipe in the Value field.

Media-Store — Delete Capture Switcher > MediaStore > Delete a captured still.
Delete Media Capture 1. Enter the number of the capture file you want to delete in
the Capture File field.

Media-Store Load Switcher > MediaStore > Load a media item into the selected Media-Store channel.
Load 1. Click the MediaStore Channel button for the Media-Store
channel you want to perform the event on.
2. Click the Location button to select whether the media item
you want to load is located on the internal storage
(Internal) or on the USB (USB).
3. Enter the number of the media item you want to load in
the Media Number field.

Media-Store — Looping Switcher > MediaStore > Select whether an animation will loop at the end for the selected
Attributes Media-Store channel.
1. Click the MediaStore Channel button for the Media-Store
channel you want to perform the event on.
2. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
3. Click the Parameter button and select Looping.
4. Click the Value button and select whether the animation
loops at the end (On) or not (Off).

Media-Store — Move To Frame Switcher > MediaStore > Move to a specific frame in the media item for the selected Media
Attributes -Store channel.
1. Click the MediaStore Channel button for the Media-Store
channel you want to perform the event on.
2. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
3. Click the Parameter button and select Move To Frame.
4. Enter the frame that you want to jump to in the media item
in the Value field.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Custom Control Events • 127

 Event Location Description

Media-Store — Mute Switcher > MediaStore > Select whether the associated audio is turned on or off during
Attributes playback for the selected Media-Store channel.
1. Click the MediaStore Channel button for the Media-Store
channel you want to perform the event on.
2. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
3. Click the Parameter button and select Mute.
4. Click the Value button and select whether the audio plays
(On) or not (Off).

Media-Store — Play Switcher > MediaStore > Start an animation playing for the selected Media-Store channel.
Channel Action 1. Click the MediaStore Channel button for the Media-Store
channel you want to perform the event on.
2. Click Toggle Play.

Media-Store — Play Speed Switcher > MediaStore > Select the speed for an animation to play at on the selected
Playback Speed Media-Store channel.
1. Click the MediaStore Channel button for the Media-Store
channel you want to perform the event on.
2. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
3. Click the Parameter button and select Playback Speed.
4. Enter the speed, faster or slower than 100%, that you want
the animation to play at in the Value (%) field.

Media-Store — Reset Media Switcher > MediaStore > Reset the selected Media-Store channel.
Channel Action 1. Click the MediaStore Channel button for the Media-Store
channel you want to perform the event on.
2. Click Reset Media.

Media-Store — Reverse Switcher > MediaStore > Select whether an animation plays in reverse for the selected
Attributes Media-Store channel.
1. Click the MediaStore Channel button for the Media-Store
channel you want to perform the event on.
2. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
3. Click the Parameter button and select Reverse.
4. Click the Value button and select whether the animation
plays in reverse (On) or not (Off).

Media-Store — Rewind Switcher > MediaStore > Rewind an animation to the first frame for the selected Media
Channel Action -Store channel.
1. Click the MediaStore Channel button for the Media-Store
channel you want to perform the event on.
2. Click Move to Frame 1.

128 • Custom Control Events — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Event Location Description

Media-Store — Shaped Switcher > MediaStore > Select whether the alpha of the media item should be shaped
Attributes or ushaped for the selected Media-Store channel.
1. Click the MediaStore Channel button for the Media-Store
channel you want to perform the event on.
2. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
3. Click the Parameter button and select Shaped.
4. Click the Value button and select whether the alpha of the
media item is shaped (On) or not (Off).

Media-Store — Trigger GPI Switcher > MediaStore > Select the GPI output that you want to trigger with a MediaWipe
Output Attributes for the selected Media-Store channel.
1. Click the MediaStore Channel button for the Media-Store
channel you want to perform the event on.
2. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
3. Click the Parameter button and select GPO.
4. Enter the GPI output that you want to trigger with the
MediaWipe in the Value field.

Media-Store — Trigger GPI Switcher > MediaStore > Select the time from the start of the MediaWipe that the GPI
Output Delay Attributes output is triggered for the selected Media-Store channel.
1. Click the MediaStore Channel button for the Media-Store
channel you want to perform the event on.
2. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
3. Click the Parameter button and select GPO Frame.
4. Enter the delay, in frames, for the GPI output to be triggered
in the Value (fr) field.

Media-Store — X-Position Switcher > MediaStore > Select the x-axis position for the media item for the selected
Attributes Media-Store channel.
1. Click the MediaStore Channel button for the Media-Store
channel you want to perform the event on.
2. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
3. Click the Parameter button and select X-Pos.
4. Enter a new position in the Value field.

Media-Store — Y-Position Switcher > MediaStore > Select the y-axis position for the media item for the selected
Attributes Media-Store channel.
1. Click the MediaStore Channel button for the Media-Store
channel you want to perform the event on.
2. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
3. Click the Parameter button and select Y-Pos.
4. Enter a new position in the Value field.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Custom Control Events • 129

 Event Location Description

MediaWipe — Channel Switcher > Transition > Select which Media-Store channel will be used for the MediaWipe
Media Wipe Channel transition of the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click M1 or M2 to assign that Media-Store channel to the
MediaWipe.

MediaWipe Cut Point, Set Switcher > Transition > Sets the cut point for a MediaWipe transition for the selected
ME Trans Action area. You must select the point in the transition that you want
to place the cut before running this event.
1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Action button and select Set Media Cut.

MediaWipe — Direction, Flip-Flop Switcher > Transition > Select whether the MediaWipe reverses direction for every
Media Wipe Direction second transition of the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
3. Click Flip-Flip.
4. Click the Value button and select whether Flip-Flop is on
(On) or not (Off).

MediaWipe — Direction Switcher > Transition > Select the direction for the MediaWipe transition of the selected
Media Wipe Direction ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
3. Click Direction.
4. Click the Value button and select whether the MediaWipe
moves in a forward (Forward) or reverse (Reverse)
direction.

MediaWipe — Layer Switcher > Transition > Select which Media-Store channel will be used for the MediaWipe
ME Media Trans Layer transition of the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Layer button to select what the MediaWipe
animation covers.

MediaWipe Trans End Point, Set Switcher > Transition > Sets the ending point for a MediaWipe transition for the selected
ME Trans Action area. Use the fader to move through the animation to the point
you want to end the transition and run this CC to save that point.
1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Action button and select Set Media Trans End.

MediaWipe Trans Start Point, Set Switcher > Transition > Sets the starting point for a MediaWipe transition for the selected
ME Trans Action area. Use the fader to move through the animation to the point
you want to start the transition and run this CC to save that
point.
1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Action button and select Set Media Trans Start.

130 • Custom Control Events — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Event Location Description

MediaWipe Trans Thumbnail Switcher > Transition > Sets the starting point for a MediaWipe transition for the selected
ME Trans Action area.
1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Action button and select Set Media Thumb.

Memory Recall Switcher > Memory Recall Recall a memory for the selected area.
1. Click the Include button and select all the locations that
you want to perform the memory recall on.
2. Click the Bank button and select the bank that you want to
recall the memory on.
3. Click the Memory button and select the memory that you
want to recall.

ME Trans Rate Switcher > Transition > Set or reset the background transition rate of the selected area.
ME Trans Parameter 1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Parameter button and select ME Trans Rate.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Enter a new transition rate, in frames, in the Value (fr) field.

ME Trans Type Switcher > Transition > Select the transition type for a background transition of the
ME Trans Type selected area.
1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Type button for the type of transition you want to
use.

MultiScreen — Edge Blending Switcher Installation > Select whether edge blending is applied to the edges of the
MultiScreen > Edge overlapping edges for the selected MultiScreen.
Properties 1. Click the ME button for the MultiScreen that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Parameter button and select Blending.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Click the Edge button and select the edge that you want to
adjust.
5. Click the Value button and select whether blending is
applied edge (On) or not (Off).

MultiScreen — Edge Distance Switcher Installation > Select the distance between screens for the selected MultiScreen.
MultiScreen > Edge 1. Click the ME button for the MultiScreen that you want to
Parameters perform the event on.
2. Click the Parameter button and select Distance.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Click the Edge button and select the edge that you want to
adjust.
5. Enter the distance between the screens on the selected
edge in the Value (%) field.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Custom Control Events • 131

 Event Location Description

MultiScreen — Edge Gamma Switcher Installation > Select the amount of gamma correction applied to the
MultiScreen > Edge overlapping edges for the selected MultiScreen.
Parameters 1. Click the ME button for the MultiScreen that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Parameter button and select Gamma.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Click the Edge button and select the edge that you want to
adjust.
5. Enter the amount of gamma correction in the Value (%)
field.

MultiScreen — Edge Smoothness Switcher Installation > Select the amount of smoothing applied to the overlapping
MultiScreen > Edge edges for the selected MultiScreen.
Parameters
1. Click the ME button for the MultiScreen that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Parameter button and select Smoothness.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Click the Edge button and select the edge that you want to
adjust.
5. Enter the amount of smoothing in the Value (%) field.

MultiScreen — Layout Switcher Installation > Select a layout for the selected MultiScreen.
MultiScreen > Layout 1. Click the ME button for the MultiScreen that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Layout button and select the layout you want to
use.

MultiScreen — Offset Switcher Installation > Select the placement of the background scaling for the selected
MultiScreen > Offset MultiScreen.
1. Click the ME button for the MultiScreen that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Parameter button and select Offset.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Enter the amount of offset in the Value (%) field.

MultiViewer Box — Aspect Ratio MultiViewer > Box > MV Select whether aspect ratio markers are shown for the selected
Markers Box Aspect Ratio box on the selected MultiViewer.
1. Click a MultiViewer button to select which MultiViewer you
want that you want to perform the event on.
2. Click the Box button and select the box that you want
perform the event on.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Click a Value button and select whether aspect ratio
markers are shown (On) or not (Off).

132 • Custom Control Events — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Event Location Description

MultiViewer Box — Border MultiViewer > Box > MV Select the type of border you want to apply to the selected box
Box Border Mode on the selected MultiViewer.
1. Click a MultiViewer button to select which MultiViewer you
want that you want to perform the event on.
2. Click the Box button and select the box that you want
perform the event on.
3. Click a Border Mode button and select whether the border
around the selected box is white (White), black (Black), or
if there is no border (Off).

MultiViewer Box — Green Tally MultiViewer > Box > MV Select whether a green (preview) tally is shown for the selected
(Preview) Box Preview Tally box on the selected MultiViewer.
1. Click a MultiViewer button to select which MultiViewer you
want that you want to perform the event on.
2. Click the Box button and select the box that you want
perform the event on.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Click a Value button and select whether a green tally is
shown on the selected box (On) or not (Off).

MultiViewer Box — Label MultiViewer > Box > MV Select whether the source label is on or off for the selected box
Box Label on the selected MultiViewer.
1. Click a MultiViewer button to select which MultiViewer you
want that you want to perform the event on.
2. Click the Box button and select the box that you want
perform the event on.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Click a Value button and select whether the label on the
selected box is on (On) or not (Off).

MultiViewer Box — Label Mode MultiViewer > Box > MV Select what source name is shown on the label for the selected
Box Label Mode box on the selected MultiViewer. This event only applies to the
Carbonite eXtreme.
1. Click a MultiViewer button to select which MultiViewer you
want that you want to perform the event on.
2. Click the Box button and select the box that you want
perform the event on.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Click a Label Mode button and select whether the name
comes from the switcher (Switcher), the router (Router),
or both are shown (Both).

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Custom Control Events • 133

 Event Location Description

MultiViewer Box — Label MultiViewer > Box > MV Select the position of the source label for the selected box on
Position Box Label Position the selected MultiViewer.
1. Click a MultiViewer button to select which MultiViewer you
want that you want to perform the event on.
2. Click the Box button and select the box that you want
perform the event on.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Click a Value button and select whether the label on the
selected box is at the top (Top) or bottom (Bottom).

MultiViewer Box — Label MultiViewer > MV Label Select transparency for the background behind the source labels
Transparency Transp on the selected MultiViewer.
1. Click a MultiViewer button to select which MultiViewer you
want that you want to perform the event on.
2. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
3. Enter the amount of transparency in the Value (%) field.

MultiViewer Box — MultiScreen MultiViewer > Box > MV Select whether the MultiScreen overlay is shown for the selected
Markers Box MultiScreen Marker box on the selected MultiViewer. The overlay shows what
portions of the image are cropped out to fit into the output of
the MultiScreen.
1. Click a MultiViewer button to select which MultiViewer you
want that you want to perform the event on.
2. Click the Box button and select the box that you want
perform the event on.
3. Click the ME button and select the MultiScreen you want to
view.
4. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
5. Click a Value button and select whether the overlay is
shown (On) or not (Off).

MultiViewer Box — Red Tally MultiViewer > Box > MV Select whether a red (on-air) tally is shown for the selected box
(On-Air) Box On-Air Tally on the selected MultiViewer.
1. Click a MultiViewer button to select which MultiViewer you
want that you want to perform the event on.
2. Click the Box button and select the box that you want
perform the event on.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Click a Value button and select whether a red tally is shown
on the selected box (On) or not (Off).

MultiViewer Box — Video Source MultiViewer > Box > MV Assign a source to one of the boxes on the selected MultiViewer.
Box Source 1. Click a MultiViewer button to select which MultiViewer you
want that you want to perform the event on.
2. Click the Box button and select the box that you want
perform the event on.
3. Click the Value button and select the source that you want
to assign to the box.

134 • Custom Control Events — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Event Location Description

MultiViewer — Clip MultiViewer > MV Keyer Select the amount of clipping to be applied to the overlay source
Clip on the selected MultiViewer.
1. Click a MultiViewer button to select which MultiViewer you
want that you want to perform the event on.
2. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
3. Enter the amount of clipping to be applied in the Value
field.

MultiViewer Clock — MultiViewer > Clock > MV Select a preset color for the background of the clock on the
Background Color (Preset) Clock (Preset Color) selected MultiViewer.
1. Click a MultiViewer button to select which MultiViewer you
want that you want to perform the event on.
2. Click Background.
3. Click the Color button and select the color you want to use.

MultiViewer Clock — Foreground MultiViewer > Clock > MV Select the custom color for the lettering of the clock on the
Color (HSL) Clock (HSL Color) selected MultiViewer.
1. Click a MultiViewer button to select which MultiViewer you
want that you want to perform the event on.
2. Click the Clock Area button and select Foreground.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Click the Component button and select the HSL component
you want to assign a value to. A value should be applied to
all three components.
5. Enter a value for the selected component in the Value (%)
field.

MultiViewer Clock — Foreground MultiViewer > Clock > MV Select a preset color for the lettering of the clock on the selected
Color (Preset) Clock (Preset Color) MultiViewer.
1. Click a MultiViewer button to select which MultiViewer you
want that you want to perform the event on.
2. Click Foreground.
3. Click the Color button and select the color you want to use.

MultiViewer Clock — Format MultiViewer > Clock > MV Select the hour format for the clock on the selected MultiViewer.
Clock Format 1. Click a MultiViewer button to select which MultiViewer you
want that you want to perform the event on.
2. Click a Value button and select whether the clock shows
24-hour (24-Hours), 12-hour with am/pm (12-Hour AM/PM),
or simple 12-hour (12-Hour) clock.

MultiViewer Clock — Mode MultiViewer > Clock > MV Select whether the clock shows timecode or system time on the
Clock Mode selected MultiViewer.
1. Click a MultiViewer button to select which MultiViewer you
want that you want to perform the event on.
2. Click a Clock Mode button and select whether the clock
shows timecode (Timecode), system time (System), or is
off (Off).

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Custom Control Events • 135

 Event Location Description

MultiViewer Clock — Size MultiViewer > Clock > MV Select the size of the clock on the selected MultiViewer.
Clock Param 1. Click a MultiViewer button to select which MultiViewer you
want that you want to perform the event on.
2. Click Clock Size.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Enter the size of the clock in the Value (%) field.

MultiViewer Clock — Timecode MultiViewer > Clock > MV Select whether number of frames for a timecode are shown on
Frame Count Clock Frame Count the selected MultiViewer.
1. Click a MultiViewer button to select which MultiViewer you
want that you want to perform the event on.
2. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
3. Click a Value button and select whether the frame count is
shown (On) or not (Off).

MultiViewer Clock — X-Position MultiViewer > Clock > MV Select the horizontal position of the clock on the selected
Clock Param MultiViewer.
1. Click a MultiViewer button to select which MultiViewer you
want that you want to perform the event on.
2. Click Clock X-Pos.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Enter the horizontal position of the clock in the Value (%)
field.

MultiViewer MultiViewer > Clock > MV Select the custom color for the background of the clock on the
Clock (HSL Color) selected MultiViewer.
1. Click a MultiViewer button to select which MultiViewer you
want that you want to perform the event on.
2. Click the Clock Area button and select Background.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Click the Component button and select the HSL component
you want to assign a value to. A value should be applied to
all three components.
5. Enter a value for the selected component in the Value (%)
field.

MultiViewer — FSFC Label MultiViewer > MV FSFC Select whether FSFC is shown on the label on the selected
Label MultiViewer when a source has an FSFC applies to it.
1. Click a MultiViewer button to select which MultiViewer you
want that you want to perform the event on.
2. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
3. Click a Value button to select whether FSFC is shown on
the label (On) or not (Off).

136 • Custom Control Events — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Event Location Description

MultiViewer — Layout MultiViewer > MV Layout Select a layout for the selected MultiViewer.
1. Click a MultiViewer button to select which MultiViewer you
want that you want to perform the event on.
2. Click the Layout button and select the layout you want to
use.

MultiViewer — Outputs Switcher Installation > Select which outputs the MultiViewer is available on. This feature
Output Mode is only available when the switcher is operating in a
standard-definition or 3G video mode.
1. Click an Outputs button to select which pair of output BNCs
you want to assign to as MultiViewer outputs.
2. Click a Lock MultiViewers button to assign the selected
output BNCs as MultiViewer outputs (On) or not (Off).

MultiViewer — Tally Display MultiViewer > MV Tally Select how the tallies are shown on the selected MultiViewer.
Display 1. Click a MultiViewer button to select which MultiViewer you
want that you want to perform the event on.
2. Click a Tally Display button to select whether tallies are
shown as a border around the box (Box), as boxes on either
side of the label (Label), or as boxes on either side of the
label but swapped (Label Reverse).

Output BNC Assignment Switcher Installation > Assign a source to the selected output BNC.
Output Assignment 1. Click the Output button and select the output BNC that you
want to assign a source to.
2. Click the Source button and select the source that you want
to assign to the selected output BNC.

Pause CC Special > Hold Insert a pause into the custom control.
1. Enter the length of the pause in the Pause (fr) field.

PBus — Recall Devices > PBus Recall a register on the selected PBus device.
1. Click PBus Recall Register.
2. Click the PBus button and select the device you want to
send the command to.
3. Click the Device button and select the channel you want to
send the command to.
4. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
5. Enter number of the register you want to recall in the
Register field.

PBus — Trigger Devices > PBus Trigger a function on the selected PBus device.
1. Click PBus Trigger Function.
2. Click the PBus button and select the device you want to
send the command to.
3. Click the Device button and select the channel you want to
send the command to.
4. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
5. Enter the number of the function you want to trigger in the
Function field.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Custom Control Events • 137

 Event Location Description

Personality — Auto Remove Key Switcher Personality > Have a key removed from the Next Transition area, so that it is
Auto Remove Key not included in the next transition, after it has been transitioned
off-air using the KEY X CUT or KEY X AUTO buttons.
1. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
2. Click the Value button and select whether the personality
option is on (On) or not (Off).

Personality — Auto Trans Second Switcher Personality > Select how the switcher reacts when the KEY AUTO button is
Press (Key) Key Auto Trans 2nd Press pressed during a transition.
1. Click the Second Auto button and select how the switcher
reacts to pressing the button during a transition.
• Ignore — the buttons are ignored during the transition
• Halt Forward — halt the transition and move forward
through the transition when pressed again
• Halt Reverse — halt the transition and move backwards
through the transition when pressed again
• Reverse — reverse the transition immediately
• Cut — cut the transition to the end

Personality — Auto Trans Second Switcher Personality > ME Select how the switcher reacts when the AUTO TRANS button
Press (ME) Auto Trans 2nd Press is pressed during a transition.
1. Click the Second Auto button and select how the switcher
reacts to pressing the button during a transition.
• Ignore — the buttons are ignored during the transition
• Halt Forward — halt the transition and move forward
through the transition when pressed again
• Halt Reverse — halt the transition and move backwards
through the transition when pressed again
• Reverse — reverse the transition immediately
• Cut — cut the transition to the end

Personality — Next Trans Reset Switcher Personality > Have the transition area reset to a default background dissolve
Auto Reset Trans after each transition.
1. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
2. Click the Value button and select whether the personality
option is on (On) or not (Off).

Personality — Roll Clip Switcher Personality > Select whether the Roll Clip functionality is always on.
Roll Clip Force 1. Click a Value button to select whether Roll Clip is always
on (Force) or must be turned on manually (User).

Play CC Special > Play CC Play a custom control. Note: The Play CC command applies to
a target custom control button only. If you move the contents
of the custom control from the button selected in the Play CC
to another button, the Play CC command will not follow and will
continue to play the custom control assigned to the original
button.
1. Click the Bank button and select the custom control bank
you want to play a custom control on.
2. Click the CC button and select the custom control you want
to play.

138 • Custom Control Events — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Event Location Description

Reference Source Switcher Installation > Select the reference source for the switcher.
Reference > Video 1. Click a Reference Source button to select whether to use
Reference an internal (Internal) or external (External) reference
source.

Reset Switcher > Transition > Resets the transition area of the selected area.
ME Trans Action 1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Action button and select Reset.

Resume CC Special > Resume CC Resume a custom control at hold.

1. Click the Bank button and select the custom control bank
you want to resume a custom control on.
2. Click the CC button and select the custom control you want
to resume.

Robotic Camera — Halt All Devices > Camera Send the halt command to the selected camera.
1. Click Camera Halt All.
2. Click the Camera button and select the device you want to
send the command to.

Robotic Camera — Recall Shot Devices > Camera Recall a shot on the selected camera at the rate/speed set in the
shot.
1. Click Recall Shot.
2. Click the Camera button and select the device you want to
send the command to.
3. Click the Channel button and select the channel you want
to send the command to.
4. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
5. Enter the shot number you want to recall from in the Shot
field.

Robotic Camera — Recall Shot Devices > Camera Recall a shot on the selected camera as quickly as possible.
Fast 1. Click Recall Shot (Fast).
2. Click the Camera button and select the device you want to
send the command to.
3. Click the Channel button and select the channel you want
to send the command to.
4. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
5. Enter the shot number you want to recall from in the Shot
field.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Custom Control Events • 139

 Event Location Description

Robotic Camera — Store Shot Devices > Camera Store a shot on the selected camera.
1. Click Store Shot.
2. Click the Camera button and select the device you want to
send the command to.
3. Click the Channel button and select the channel you want
to send the command to.
4. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
5. Enter the shot number you want to store to in the Shot
field.

Roll Clip Switcher > Transition > Turn the Roll Clip feature on or off for the selected area.
Roll Clip 1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Value button and select whether roll clip is on (On)
or not (Off).

RossTalk CC Devices > RossTalk Send the simulated custom control to the selected device.
1. Click CC.
2. Click the RossTalk Device button and select the device you
want to send the RossTalk command to.
3. Enter the bank of the custom control in the Bank field.
4. Enter the number of the custom control in the Custom field.

RossTalk Clear Devices > RossTalk Send the Clear Framebuffer command for a framebuffer and
layer to the selected device.
1. Click Clear Channel.
2. Click the RossTalk Device button and select the device you
want to send the RossTalk command to.
3. Enter the framebuffer that you want to clear in the Channel
field.
4. Enter the layer that you want to clear in the Layer field.

RossTalk — Cue (item + Devices > RossTalk Send the Cue command for a specific item and framebuffer to
framebuffer) the selected device.
1. Click Cue (2).
2. Click the RossTalk Device button and select the device you
want to send the RossTalk command to.
3. Enter the take item id of the item you want to cue in the
Take ID field.
4. Enter the framebuffer that you want to cue the item on in
the Channel field.

RossTalk — Cue (item + Devices > RossTalk Send the Cue command for a specific item and location to the
framebuffer + layer) selected device.
1. Click Cue (3).
2. Click the RossTalk Device button and select the device you
want to send the RossTalk command to.
3. Enter the take item id of the item you want to cue in the
Take ID field.
4. Enter the framebuffer that you want to cue the item on in
the Channel field.
5. Enter the layer that you want to cue the item on in the Layer
field.

140 • Custom Control Events — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Event Location Description

RossTalk — Cue Current Devices > RossTalk Send the Cue command to the selected device.
1. Click Cue.
2. Click the RossTalk Device button and select the device you
want to send the RossTalk command to.

RossTalk Custom Command Devices > RossTalk Send a manual RossTalk string to the selected device.
1. Click a RossTalk CustomCmd button for how you want the
custom control command message to be formatted.
• CRLF — message ends with a carriage return and a line
feed.
• CR — message ends with a carriage return.
• LF — message ends with a line feed.
• no CRLF — message ends without a carriage return or
a line feed.

2. Click the RossTalk Device button and select the device you
want to send the RossTalk command to.
3. Enter the RossTalk string in the Custom Cmd field.

RossTalk — Focus Devices > RossTalk Send the Focus command for a specific item to the selected
device.
1. Click Focus.
2. Click the RossTalk Device button and select the device you
want to send the RossTalk command to.
3. Enter the take item id of the item you want to have focus
in the Take ID field.

RossTalk — GPI Devices > RossTalk Send the simulated GPI input to the selected device.
1. Click GPI.
2. Click the RossTalk Device button and select the device you
want to send the RossTalk command to.
3. Enter the GPI you want to simulate triggering in the GPI
field.

RossTalk — Next Devices > RossTalk Send the Next command to the selected device.
1. Click Take Next.
2. Click the RossTalk Device button and select the device you
want to send the RossTalk command to.

RossTalk — Read Devices > RossTalk Send the Read command for a specific item and layer to the
selected device.
1. Click Read.
2. Click the RossTalk Device button and select the device you
want to send the RossTalk command to.
3. Enter the take item id of the item you want to read in the
Take ID field.
4. Enter the layer that you want to cue the item on in the Layer
field.

RossTalk — Resume Devices > RossTalk Send the Resume command for a framebuffer and layer to the
selected device.
1. Click Resume Channel.
2. Click the RossTalk Device button and select the device you
want to send the RossTalk command to.
3. Enter the framebuffer that you want to resume in the
Channel field.
4. Enter the layer that you want to resume in the Layer field.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Custom Control Events • 141

 Event Location Description

RossTalk — Sequencer Down Devices > RossTalk Send the Sequencer Down command to the selected device.
1. Click Sequencer Down.
2. Click the RossTalk Device button and select the device you
want to send the RossTalk command to.

RossTalk — Sequencer Up Devices > RossTalk Send the Sequencer Up command to the selected device.
1. Click Sequencer Up.
2. Click the RossTalk Device button and select the device you
want to send the RossTalk command to.

RossTalk — Swap Current Devices > RossTalk Send the Swap command to the selected device.
1. Click Swap.
2. Click the RossTalk Device button and select the device you
want to send the RossTalk command to.

RossTalk — Swap Devices > RossTalk Send the Swap command for a specific location to the selected
device.
1. Click Swap (2).
2. Click the RossTalk Device button and select the device you
want to send the RossTalk command to.
3. Enter the framebuffer that you want to swap the items on
in the Channel field.
4. Enter the layer that you want to swap the items on in the
Layer field.

RossTalk — Take Current Devices > RossTalk Send the Take command to the selected device.
1. Click Take.
2. Click the RossTalk Device button and select the device you
want to send the RossTalk command to.

RossTalk — Take Devices > RossTalk Send the Take command for a specific item and location to the
selected device.
1. Click Take (3).
2. Click the RossTalk Device button and select the device you
want to send the RossTalk command to.
3. Enter the take item id of the item you want to take in the
Take ID field.
4. Enter the framebuffer that you want to take the item on in
the Channel field.
5. Enter the layer that you want to take the item on in the
Layer field.

RossTalk — Take Off Devices > RossTalk Send the Take Off command for a specific item to the selected
device.
1. Click Take Offline.
2. Click the RossTalk Device button and select the device you
want to send the RossTalk command to.
3. Enter the take item id of the item you want to take in the
Take ID field.

RState, Load Switcher > Load RState Load the custom reset settings for the selected area.
1. Click the Include button and select all the locations that
you want to recall the custom reset settings on.

Source Substitution, Delete Switcher Installation > Delete an entry from the substitution table.
Source Substitution > 1. Click the Source button and select the source that you want
Delete Subst Table to delete the substitution(s) for. If more than one
substitution entry exists for the selected source, all those
entries will be deleted.

142 • Custom Control Events — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Event Location Description

Source Substitution Switcher Installation > Set a source substitution for the substitution table.
Source Substitution > 1. Click the Source button and select the source that you want
Source ME Sub to set a substitution for.
2. Click the ME button and select the MiniME™ that you want
to assign a substitution source to.
3. Click the Subst button and select the source you want to
substitute for the selected source.

State, Insert Special > State Insert the current state of the switcher into the custom control.
1. Click State Attributes and select the elements that you
want to include in the state of the switcher when it is stored
to the custom control.

Switching Field Switcher Installation > Select the field that a video transition will be performed on.
Field Switch 1. Click a Switch Field button to select whether video
transitions are performed on field 1 only (Field 1), field 2
only(Field 2), or the current field (Both).

Trans Clear Switcher > Transition > Configures the next transition area of the selected area to take
ME Trans Action all keys off-air with the next transition.
1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Action button and select Trans Clear.

Trans Elements Switcher > Transition > Select the elements to be included in the next transition of the
ME Trans Elements selected area.
1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Elements button and select background and/or
the keys that you want to include in the next transition.

Trans Limit — On/Off Switcher > Transition > Turn the transition limit feature on or off for the selected area.
ME Trans Limit 1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
3. Click the Value button and select whether trans limit is on
(On) or not (Off).

Trans Limit — Reset Switcher > Transition > Resets the transition limit point of the selected area.
ME Trans Action 1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Action button and select Reset Limit.

Trans Limit — Set Switcher > Transition > Sets the transition limit point of the selected area. You must
ME Trans Action select the point in the transition that you want to place the limit
before running this event.
1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Action button and select Set Limit.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Custom Control Events • 143

 Event Location Description

Trans Limit — Value Switcher > Transition > Select the limit point for the trans limit of the selected area.
ME Trans Limit Value 1. Click the ME button and select the area that you want to
perform the event on.
2. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
3. Enter the point in the transition that you want to place the
trans limit in the Value (%) field.

Video Mode Switcher Installation > Select the video format that the switcher will operate in.
Reference > Video Format 1. Click the Video Mode button and select the video format
for the switcher.

Video Server — Cue Devices > Video Server Send the Cue command and name of clip to cue to the selected
device.
1. Click Cue.
2. Click the Video Server button and select the device you
want to send the command to.
3. Click a Channel button to select the channel you want to
send the command to.
4. Enter the identifier of the clip in the Clip Name field.

Video Server — Loop Off Devices > Video Server Send the Loop Off command to the selected device.
1. Click Loop Off.
2. Click the Video Server button and select the device you
want to send the command to.
3. Click a Channel button to select the channel you want to
send the command to.

Video Server — Loop On Devices > Video Server Send the Loop On command to the selected device.
1. Click Loop On.
2. Click the Video Server button and select the device you
want to send the command to.
3. Click a Channel button to select the channel you want to
send the command to.

Video Server — Play Devices > Video Server Send the Play command to the selected device.
1. Click Play.
2. Click the Video Server button and select the device you
want to send the command to.
3. Click a Channel button to select the channel you want to
send the command to.

Video Server — Record Devices > Video Server Send the Record command to the selected device.
1. Click Record.
2. Click the Video Server button and select the device you
want to send the command to.
3. Click a Channel button to select the channel you want to
send the command to.

Video Server — Stop Devices > Video Server Send the Stop command to the selected device.
1. Click Play.
2. Click the Video Server button and select the device you
want to send the command to.
3. Click a Channel button to select the channel you want to
send the command to.

144 • Custom Control Events — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Event Location Description

Wash Color (HSL) Switcher > Matte > Wash Select the custom matte color for the selected ME or aux. Each
Color (HSL) component of the HSL color must be inserted individually. This
is the second color of the wash, the first color is set from the
matte color.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Matte button and select Wash.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Click the Component button and select the HSL component
you want to assign a value to. A value should be applied to
all three components.
5. Enter a value for the selected component in the Value (%)
field.

Wash Color (Preset) Switcher > Matte > Wash Select a preset wash color for the selected ME. This is the second
Color (Preset) color of the wash, the first color is set from the matte color.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Matte button and select Wash.
3. Click the Color button and select the color you want to use.

Wash Color Reset Switcher > Matte > Wash Reset the matte color for the selected ME. This is the second
Color Reset color of the wash, the first color is set from the matte color.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Matte button and select Wash.

Wash Generator — Disable Switcher > Matte > Wash Disable the wash generator for the selected ME.
Enabled Reset 1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.

Wash Generator — Enable Switcher > Matte > Wash Enable the wash generator for the selected ME.
Enabled 1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Wash button and select whether the wash
generator is enabled (On) or not (Off).

Wipe Direction (Flip-Flop) Switcher > Transition > Select whether the wipe reverses direction for every second
Wipe Direction transition of the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Pattern button and select Wipe.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Click the Parameter button and select Flip-Flip.
5. Click the Value button and select whether Flip-Flop is on
(On) or off (Off).

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Custom Control Events • 145

 Event Location Description

Wipe Direction Switcher > Transition > Select the direction for the wipe transition of the selected ME.
Wipe Direction 1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Pattern button and select Wipe.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Click the Parameter button and select Direction.
5. Click the Value button and select whether the wipe moves
in a forward (Forward) or reverse (Reverse) direction.

Wipe Pattern — Aspect Ratio Switcher > Transition > Select the aspect ratio for the wipe pattern you want to use for
Wipe Param a wipe transition of the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Parameter button and select Aspect.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Enter an aspect ratio in the Value (%) field.

Wipe Pattern — Border Color Switcher > Transition > Select the custom color you want to apply to the border of the
(HSL) Wipe Border Color (HSL) pattern for the wipe transition of the selected ME. Each
component of the HSL color must be inserted individually.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Matte button and select Wipe Border.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Click the Component button and select the HSL component
you want to assign a value to. A value should be applied to
all three components.
5. Enter a value for the selected component in the Value (%)
field.

Wipe Pattern — Border Color Switcher > Transition > Select the preset color you want to apply to the border of the
(Preset) Wipe Border Color pattern for the wipe transition of the selected ME.
(Preset) 1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Matte button and select Wipe Border.
3. Click the Color button and select the preset color you want
to apply to the border.

Wipe Pattern — Border Size Switcher > Transition > Select the size of border for the wipe pattern you want to use
Wipe Param for a wipe transition of the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Parameter button and select Border Size.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Enter a size for the border in the Value (%) field.

146 • Custom Control Events — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Event Location Description

Wipe Pattern — Edge Softness Switcher > Transition > Select the amount of softness to apply to the edge of the pattern
Wipe Param or border for the wipe pattern you want to use for a wipe
transition of the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Parameter button and select Softness.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Enter an amount of softness for the pattern or border in
the Value (%) field.

Wipe Pattern — Horizontal Switcher > Transition > Select the number of times you want to multiply the wipe pattern
Multiplication Wipe Param horizontally for the wipe transition of the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Parameter button and select Horizontal Mult.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Enter the number of times the pattern is multiplied in the
Value field.

Wipe Pattern — Pattern Switcher > Transition > Select the pattern you want to use for a wipe transition of the
Wipe Effect selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Pattern button and select the pattern you want
to use for the wipe.

Wipe Pattern — Rotation Switcher > Transition > Select the rotation for the wipe pattern you want to use for a
Wipe Param wipe transition of the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Parameter button and select Rotation.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Enter a rotation in the Value (%) field.

Wipe Pattern — Size Switcher > Transition > Select the size for the wipe pattern you want to use for a wipe
Wipe Param transition of the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Parameter button and select Size.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Enter a new size in the Value (%) field.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Custom Control Events • 147

 Event Location Description

Wipe Pattern — Vertical Switcher > Transition > Select the number of times you want to multiply the wipe pattern
Multiplication Wipe Param vertically for the wipe transition of the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Parameter button and select Vertical Mult.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Enter the number of times the pattern is multiplied in the
Value field.

Wipe Pattern — X-Position Switcher > Transition > Select the x-axis position for the wipe pattern you want to use
Wipe Param for a wipe transition of the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Parameter button and select X-Pos.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Enter a new position in the Value (%) field.

Wipe Pattern — Y-Position Switcher > Transition > Select the y-axis position for the wipe pattern you want to use
Wipe Param for a wipe transition of the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click the Parameter button and select Y-Pos.
3. Click the Change Type button and select whether you want
to set (Absolute) or reset (Reset) the parameter. Some
selections will not be available when you reset the
parameter.
4. Enter a new position in the Value (%) field.

Wipe Reset Switcher > Transition > Reset the parameters or direction and flip-flop for the wipe
Wipe Reset transition of the selected ME.
1. Click the ME button for the ME that you want to perform
the event on.
2. Click Reset Params to reset the wipe parameters or Reset
Direction to reset the wipe direction and flip-flop.

148 • Custom Control Events — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Glossary Dissolve
A transition from one video signal to another
in which one signal is faded down, while the
Interlaced other is simultaneously faded up. The terms mix
An Interlaced video format starts at the top of or cross-fade are often used interchangeably
the screen and draws all the odd number scan with dissolve.
lines and then all the even number scan lines
in sequence. This results in half the image being Field
drawn in one pass and the other half of the
One half of a complete picture (or frame)
image being drawn in the second. These two
interval containing all of the odd, or all of the
passes are called Fields, where the first pass is
even, lines in interlaced scanning. One scan of
called Field 1 and the second pass is called Field
a TV screen is called a field; two fields are
2. When both Field 1 and Field 2 have been
required to make a complete picture (which is
drawn, resulting in a complete image, you have
a frame).
a single Frame.
Force, Mask
Progressive
An effect that forces the masked region to the
A Progressive scan video format draws each
foreground but is not bound by the key. For
scan line in sequence, starting from the top of
example, if you have a key and apply a mask to
the screen and working to the bottom. Unlike
it. The masked area is bound by the edges of the
Interlaced, with Progressive scan the entire
key. When force is turned on, the masked area
image is drawn at one time, in a single pass. This
is filled with the video from the key (nothing
means that there are no fields in a Progressive
appears masked) but you can move the mask
scan image.
outside of the key and the key video is still filling
the masked region.
Auto Key
A pairing of two video signals, a key video and Frame
a key alpha, to create a key. In the switcher, you
One complete picture consisting of two fields of
associate the fill and alpha so that the switcher
interlaced scanning lines.
knows which alpha to use when the video is
selected.
File Transfer Protocol
Auto Transition A network protocol that is used to transfer files
from one host computer to another over a
An automatic transition in which the manual
TCP-based network.
movement of the fader handle is simulated
electronically. The transition starts when the
AUTO TRANS button is pressed and takes place
Gain
over a pre-selected time period, measured in Gain represents the range of signal values
frames. present in a video signal from a lowest to a
highest point (from black to white for example).
Chroma Key Increasing gain expands this range, while
decreasing gain compresses this range. Clipping
Chroma Key is a key in which the hole is cut
occurs if applied gain changes cause output
based on a color value, or hue, rather than a
signal values to fall outside the allowable range.
luminance value or alpha signal. The color is
Generally, increasing the gain for a specific color
removed and replaced with background video
component causes the video signal colors to
from another source.
become increasingly saturated with that color.
Similarly, decreasing the gain for a specific color
Cut component progressively removes that color
An instantaneous switch from one video signal component from the output video signal.
to another.
Gamma
Gamma corrections introduce non-linear
corrections to a video signal. A gamma

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Glossary • 149

 correction can be described as taking a point on Key
the output versus input video signal line and An effect produced by cutting a hole in the
pulling it perpendicularly away from the line. background video, then filling the hole with
The result is a Bezier curve between the start, video or matte from another source. Key source
the new point, and the end point. Generally, video cuts the hole, key fill video fills the hole.
increasing the gamma value adds more of the The video signal used for cut and fill can come
component to the video signal in the location of from the same, or separate, sources.
the gamma offset point. Decreasing the gamma
value reduces the amount of the component in Key Alpha
the video signal in the location of the gamma
The video signal which cuts a hole in the
offset point. Moving the gamma offset point
background video to make a key effect possible.
allows you to select which part of the input
Also called Key Video or Source. In practice, this
video signal receives the gamma correction. For
signal controls when a video mixer circuit will
example, if you increase the red gamma
switch from background to key fill video.
correction to the part of the video signal that
has no red component you will add red to those
areas while having little effect on areas that Key Invert
already contain a significant amount of red. This An effect that reverses the polarity of the key
allows you to add a red tint to the image while source so that the holes in the background are
minimizing the amount of red-clipping that cut by dark areas of the key source instead of
occurs. bright areas.

General Purpose Interface Key Mask

A simple high/low signal that is used to trigger A keying technique in which a shape is
an action either on an external device or on the combined with the key source to block out
switcher. A GPI can be an input or an output to unwanted portions of the key source.
the switcher.
Key Video
High Definition A video input which is timed to fill the hole
A high definition (720p, 1080i, or 1080p/3G) provided by the key source video. An example
video signal. of key video is the video output of a character
generator.
Hue
The characteristic of a color signal that Linear Key
determines whether the color is red, yellow, Linear keys make it possible to fully specify the
green, blue, purple, etc. (the three characteristics transparency of a key from opaque, through
of a TV color signal are chrominance, transparent, to fully off. The transparency is
luminance, and hue). White, black, and gray are specified by the key alpha that is associated with
not considered hues. the key video. A keyer capable of a linear key
converts the key signal voltage directly to the
Hue Rotation transparency effect on the screen.
Hue rotate affects the color of the entire video
signal by rotating the input video hues. This Mnemonics
produces an output video signal with colors that A green, orange, or yellow display used to show
are shifted from their original hues. By rotating the names of a source above or below the source
colors around the wheel, hue values will shift. button or used as a custom command or pattern
For example, a clockwise rotation where yellows button.
become orange, reds become magenta, blues
become green. The more rotation applied, the Offsets
further around the wheel colors are shifted. Offsets shift the video signal by a set amount.
Depending on the offset applied, different parts
or all of the video signal may be affected.
Clipping occurs if applied offsets cause output
signal values to fall outside the allowable range.

150 • Glossary — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Pre-Delay
A pre-delay is a delay that is inserted into a
transition between the triggering of a GPI output
and performing the transition. The length of the
pre-delay is usually the length of time your
video server requires to start playing a clip or
your character generator required to load a
page.

RossTalk
An ethernet based protocol that allows the
control over Ross devices using plain english
commands.

Standard-Definition
A standard definition (480i or 576i) video signal.

Self Key
A key effect in which the same video signal
serves as both the key signal and key fill.

Shaped Key
An additive key where the Key Alpha cuts a hole
based on the monochrome value of the alpha.
Shades of gray are translated into either white
or black, giving the key a hard edge. Shaped Key
alphas are sometimes used with Character
Generators to cut very precise holes for the fill.

Split Key
A Split key allows you to assign a different alpha
source for a key than the fill/alpha associations
that are set up during configuration or to use a
separate alpha source for a Self key.

Tally
An indicator which illuminates when the
associated button, or control, is selected or is
on-air.

Unshaped Key
A multiplicative key where the Key Alpha cuts
a hole based on the gradient values of the alpha.
Shades of gray are translated into transparency
levels, giving the key a soft edge. Unshaped Key
alphas can also be considered true linear alphas.

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Glossary • 151

 Index
Numerics Clean Feed 24, 72–73
Layer Mode 73
1080p 25/29.97Hz Mode 64 Clear Custom Controls 107
3G Mode 64 Clear Memories 107
Color Background 26
Color Correction 85
A Proc Amp 85
AES Out 84 RGB 85
AES Output 84 Color Schemes 89
Allocated DVEs 105 Color Temperature 85
Ancillary Data 72 Colors, Memory Recall 47
Ancillary Mode 105 Controller Cards 102–103
Animations 52 Copy Keys 27
Aspect Ratio 82 Copy Logs 105
Aspect Ratio Conversion 82 Copy MEs 27
Full 82 CPU Temperature 105
Letterbox 82 Custom Control Buttons, ViewControl 97
Pillarbox 82 Custom Control Event 111, 121
Zoom 82 Ancillary Data Mode 111
Audio 52 Audio Pan 111
Audio Out 84 Audio Volume 111
Audio Processing and Flow 21 Auto Trans 111
Auto Follow 69 Bus Source 111
Custom Pages 69 Cancel All CC 111
Auto Key 67 Cancel CC 111
Auto Select Keys 37 Chroma Key Color 112
Auto Transition 30–32 Chroma Key Initialize 112
Aux Bus 22 Chroma Key Mode 112
Source Selection 22 Chroma Key Parameters 112
Clean Feed 112
Color Framing 112
B Cut Transition 112
DVE Freeze 113
BG Source 26
DVE Key Aspect 113
Bus Hold 46
DVE Key Border 114
Bus Map, Default 107
DVE Key Border Color (HSL) 113
Bus Maps 90
DVE Key Border Color (Preset) 113
Bus Select Buttons, ViewControl 97
DVE Key Crop (Bottom Edge) 114
DVE Key Crop (Dual Edge) 114
C DVE Key Crop (Left Edge) 114
DVE Key Crop (Right Edge) 115
Canvas 22 DVE Key Crop (Top Edge) 115
Source Selection 22 DVE Key Edge Softness 115
Capture 54 DVE Key Size 115
Cards 102–103 DVE Key X-Position 116
Controller 102 DVE Key Y-Position 116
Ethernet Interface 102 DVE Wipe Direction 116
GPIO/Tally 102 DVE Wipe Direction (Flip-Flop) 116
Input 102–103 DVE Wipe Pattern 117
Output 102–103 DVE Wipe, Reset 116
Switcher/Crosspoint 102 EmbeddedTriggers — Enable 117
CC, See Custom Controls EmbeddedTriggers — Insert 117
CC Pause 56 EmbeddedTriggers — Set DID 117
Chroma Key 38, 40 EmbeddedTriggers — Set Line 117
Advanced Mode 40 EmbeddedTriggers — Set Remote ID 117
Basic Mode 38 EmbeddedTriggers — Set SDID 117
Chroma Key Modes 38 Fly Key (DVE) 118

152 • Index — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Custom Control Event (continued) Custom Control Event (continued)
GPI Output — Edge Trigger Setup 118 Media-Store — Mute 128
GPI Output — Level Trigger Setup 118 Media-Store — Play 128
GPI Output — Mode 118 Media-Store — Play Speed 128
GPI Output — Trigger 118 Media-Store — Reset Media 128
GPI Output — Trigger Type 118 Media-Store — Reverse 128
Hold CC 118 Media-Store — Rewind 128
Key Active 119 Media-Store — Shaped 129
Key Copy 119 Media-Store — Triger GPI Output Delay 129
Key Invert 119 Media-Store — Trigger GPI Output 129
Key Mode 119 Media-Store — X-Position 129
Key Only Transition 119 Media-Store — Y-Position 129
Key Settings (Clip, Gain, Transparency) 120 MediaWipe — Channel 130
Key Trans Rate 120 MediaWipe — Direction 130
Key Type 120 MediaWipe — Direction, Flip-Flop 130
Key, Make Linear 118 MediaWipe — Layer 130
Key, Reset 120 Memory Recall 131
Layer Mode 120 MultiScreen — Edge Blending 131
Loop CC 120 MultiScreen — Edge Distance 131
Mask 125 MultiScreen — Edge Gamma 132
Mask (Box) — Left Edge Position 122 MultiScreen — Edge Smoothness 132
Mask (Box) — Right Edge Position 122 MultiScreen — Layout 132
Mask (Box) — Size 122 MultiScreen — Offset 132
Mask (Box) — Top Edge Position 122 MultiViewer — Clip 135
Mask (Box) — X-Position 123 MultiViewer — FSFC Label 136
Mask (Box) — Y-Position 123 MultiViewer — Layout 137
Mask (Pattern) — Aspect Ratio 123 MultiViewer — Outputs 137
Mask (Pattern) — Border Size 123 MultiViewer — Tally Display 137
Mask (Pattern) — Edge Softness 123 MultiViewer Box — Aspect Ratio Markers 132
Mask (Pattern) — Horizontal Multiplication 124 MultiViewer Box — Border 133
Mask (Pattern) — Pattern 124 MultiViewer Box — Green Tally (Preview) 133
Mask (Pattern) — Reset 124 MultiViewer Box — Label 133
Mask (Pattern) — Rotation 124 MultiViewer Box — Label Mode 133
Mask (Pattern) — Size 124 MultiViewer Box — Label Position 134
Mask (Pattern) — Vertical Multiplication 124 MultiViewer Box — Label Transparency 134
Mask (Pattern) — X-Position 125 MultiViewer Box — MultiScreen Markers 134
Mask (Pattern) — Y-Position 125 MultiViewer Box — Red Tally (On-Air) 134
Mask, Force 121 MultiViewer Box — Video Source 134
Mask, Invert 121 MultiViewer Clock — Background Color (HSL) 136
Mask, Reset 121 MultiViewer Clock — Background Color (Preset) 135
Matte Color (HSL) 125 MultiViewer Clock — Foreground Color (HSL) 135
Matte Color (Preset) 125 MultiViewer Clock — Foreground Color (Preset) 135
Matte Color, Reset 125 MultiViewer Clock — Format 135
ME Copy 126 MultiViewer Clock — Mode 135
ME Trans Rate 131 MultiViewer Clock — Size 136
ME Trans Type 131 MultiViewer Clock — Timecode Frame Count 136
Media Cut Point, Set 130 MultiViewer Clock — X-Position 136
Media Trans End Point, Set 130 Output BNC Assignment 137
Media Trans Start Point, Set 130 Pause CC 137
Media Trans Thumbnail 131 PBus — Recall 137
Media-Store — Auto Play 126 PBus — Trigger 137
Media-Store — Capture 126 Personality — Auto Remove Key 138
Media-Store — Capture Alpha 126 Personality — Auto Trans Second Press (Key) 138
Media-Store — Capture Mode 126 Personality — Auto Trans Second Press (ME) 138
Media-Store — Capture Source 126 Personality — Next Trans Reset 138
Media-Store — Clear Channel 126 Personality — Roll Clip 138
Media-Store — Cut Frame 127 Play CC 138
Media-Store — Delete Capture 127 Reference Source 139
Media-Store — Load 127 Reset 139
Media-Store — Looping 127 Resume CC 139
Media-Store — Move To Frame 127 Robotic Camera — Halt All 139

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Index • 153

 Custom Control Event (continued) Custom Controls 18, 56–58, 111
Robotic Camera — Recall Shot 139 CC Pause 56
Robotic Camera — Recall Shot Fast 139 Copy/Paste 58
Robotic Camera — Store Shot 140 DashBoard 18
Roll Clip 140 Deleting 58
RossTalk — CC 140 Editing 56
RossTalk — Clear 140 Events 111
RossTalk — Cue (item + framebuffer + layer) 140 Naming 57
RossTalk — Cue (item + framebuffer) 140 Recording 56
RossTalk — Cue Current 141 Run Event 56
RossTalk — Focus 141 Running 57
RossTalk — GPI 141 Custom Controls, Default 107
RossTalk — Next 141 Custom Pages 17, 69
RossTalk — Read 141 Auto Follow 69
RossTalk — Resume 141 Cut Transition 30–32
RossTalk — Sequencer Down 142 Cut Transitions 33
RossTalk — Sequencer Up 142
RossTalk — Swap 142
RossTalk — Swap Current 142
D
RossTalk — Take 142 DashBoard 17–19
RossTalk — Take Current 142 Configuration 17
RossTalk — Take Off 142 Custom Controls 18
RossTalk Custom Command 141 Live Assist 17
RState, Load 142 MediaManager 18
Source Substitution 143 Panel 19
Source Substitution, Delete 142 PaneLINK 17
State, Insert 143 Personality 18
Switching Field 143 Status 17
Trans Clear 143 ViewControl 18
Trans Elements 143 DashBoard Connections 105
Trans Limit — On/Off 143 Date, System Time 83
Trans Limit — Reset 143 Default 107
Trans Limit — Set 143 Factory 107
Trans Limit — Value 144 Default Bus Map 107
Video Mode 144 Delete Media Item 52
Video Server — Cue 144 Delete Memory 49
Video Server — Loop Off 144 Deleting a Still 52
Video Server — Loop On 144 Device Control 13
Video Server — Play 144 Diagnostics 105–106
Video Server — Record 144 Copy Logs 105
Video Server — Stop 144 DIP Switches 106
Wash Color (HSL) 145 Dissolve Transitions 33
Wash Color (Preset) 145 DVE 42–43
Wash Color Reset 145 Cropping 43
Wash Generator — Disable 145 Key 42–43
Wash Generator — Enable 145 DVE Freeze 43
Wipe Direction 146 DVE Transitions 34
Wipe Direction (Flip-Flop) 145
Wipe Pattern — Aspect Ratio 146
Wipe Pattern — Border Color (HSL) 146 E
Wipe Pattern — Border Color (Preset) 146
Edit Decision Lists 13
Wipe Pattern — Border Size 146
EDL 94
Wipe Pattern — Edge Softness 147
Eject Media Item 52
Wipe Pattern — Horizontal Multiplication 147
Engine Type 105
Wipe Pattern — Pattern 147
Ethernet 59
Wipe Pattern — Rotation 147
Ethernet Interface Cards 102
Wipe Pattern — Size 147
External Reference 105
Wipe Pattern — Vertical Multiplication 148
Wipe Pattern — X-Position 148
Wipe Pattern — Y-Position 148
Wipe Reset 148

154 • Index — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

F L
Factory Default 107 Layer Mode 73
Fade to Black 91 Live Assist 17, 69
Field Dominance 105 Custom Pages 17, 69
FlexiClean 24, 72 PaneLINK 17
Fly Key 42 LiveEDL 13, 94–95
Follows, ME 73 Capture 95
Format Conversion 80 Store 95
FPGA Temperature 105
Frame Setup, Ethernet 59
Frame Synchronizer 80
M
Freeze 43 Mask 44
FSFC 80–81 Matte 26
Input 81 ME 22
QuadFS 81 Source Selection 22
SDI-FS 81 ME Copying 27
FTP Connection 60 ME Follows 70, 73
Substitution Table 70
G Media Transitions 35
Media-Store 52–54
Glow 89 Animations 52
GPI 68, 91 Audio 52
Assign to Source 68 Capture 54
Setup 91 Clear Channel 52
GPIO/Tally Cards 102 Delete Database Entry 52
GPO Tally 92 Eject 52
File Specifications 53
Loading 53
H MediaManager 18
Help 18 DashBoard 18
Memories 46–49, 89
As Stored Attribute 47
I Attributes 48
Bus Hold 46
Input Cards 102–103
Delete 49
Input FSFC 81
No Recall Attribute 47
Interface Card 103
Recall Attribute 47
Recall Behavior 89
K Recall Colors 47
Storing 46
Key RATE 33 Memories, Default 107
Key Swap 27 Memory Button 88
Keyer Transition Buttons, ViewControl 97 MiniME 14, 22, 28, 78
Keying 37–38, 40, 42–45 Assignment 78
Auto Select 37 Source Selection 22
Chroma Key 38 Transitions 28
Chroma Key, Advanced 40 MiniME Chroma Key 42
Chroma Key, Basic 38 Mnemonic Source Names 66
DVE 42–43 Mnemonics 67
Key Priority 37 MultiPanel 101
Mask 44 MultiScreen 70, 78
Self Key 37 MiniME Assignment 78
Split 37 Substitution Table 70
Split Keys 45 MultiViewer 25, 75
Keys 27 Ancillary Source 75
Copy 27 Embedded Audio 75
Formats 75
Time-Clock 75

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Index • 155

 N RState 107
RState, Save 107
NDI 100
Network Connection 59
Network Ports 59, 109 S
Next Trans Buttons 30–32 Save Custom Reset 107
SDI-FS 81
O Self Key 37
Serial Number 105
On-Air Setting 74 Sets 50
Output Cards 102–103 Loading 50
Output Synchronizer 62 Storing 50
Outputs 71 Show Alpha 37–40, 43–44
Data Rate 71 SoftPanel 19–20
Re-Clocking 71 Bus Area 20
Video 71 Control Area 19
Menu Area 19
User Area 19
P Software Version 105
PanelBuilder 99 Source Names 66
PaneLINK 17 Sources 23
Personality 18, 87, 89 Layering 23
DashBoard 18 Re-Entry 23
MemME 89 Specifications 109–110
Memory Recall Behavior 89 GPI I/O 109
Router Mnemonics 89 LTC 110
Ports, Network 109 Serial Port 109
Power Supplies 103 Tally 109
Pre-Tiled Sources 70 Split Key 45
Preview 25 Split Keys 37
Preview, Transitions 30–32 Status 105
Proc Amp 85 Storing Memories 46
Substitution Table 70
MultiScreen 70
Q Substitution Tables 70
Switcher Mode 64, 105
QuadFS 81
Switcher Status 105
Switcher/Crosspoint Cards 102
R Switching Field 62
System Real-Time Clock 83
Rate, Transition 28
Re-Entry 23
Re-Entry Timing 23 T
Real-Time Clock, System 83
Tallies 69, 92
Rear Modules 102
GPO 92
Redundant Power 103
Temperature OK 105
Reference 61–62
Time-Clock 75
External 61
Timecode 94, 105
Internal 61
Timing Windows, Re-Entry 23
Output Sync 62
Trans Preview 30–32
Video Switching Field 62
Transition Buttons, ViewControl 97
Reference OK 105
Transitions 28, 30–35, 92
Reference Source 105
Auto Transition 30–32
Reset 107
Cut 30–32
Custom 107
Cuts 33
RGB 85
Direction 28
RGB Color Correctors 85
Dissolves 33
ROLL CLIP 30–32
DVE 34
RossLinq 60
Flip Flop 28
RossTalk Port 105
from Panel 30–32
Router Mnemonics 89

156 • Index — Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5)

Transitions (continued) Video Output 72, 75
from Touchscreen Menu 28 Ancillary Data 72
GPO Trigger 92 Clean Feed 72
Media 35 MultiViewer 75
MiniME 28 Video Outputs 71
Pause 28 Data Rate 71
Preview 30–32 Re-Clocking 71
Rate 28 Video Processing and Flow 21
Roll Clip 28 Video Source 22, 90
Trans Preview 28 Bus Map 90
Whiteflash 33 Video Sources 22
Wipes 34 External 22
Transitions Limit 28 Follows 22
Trigger GPO 92 Internal 22
TSL UMD 66 Selecting 22
TSL UMD Port 105 Selecting on DashBoard 22
ViewControl 18, 97–98, 100
Bus Selection Buttons 97
U Button Setup 98
User Buttons 90 Custom Control Buttons 97
Keyer Transition Buttons 97
NDI 100
V Transition Buttons 97
Video Inputs 65–68
Auto Key 67 W
GPI Device Control 68
Names 66 Whiteflash 33
Video Layering 23 WhiteFlash 33
Video Mode 61, 105 Wipe Transitions 34
Setup 61

Carbonite eXtreme User Manual (v15.5) — Index • 157